Home

RAy2 Microwave Link

image

Contents

1. RAy2 17 Channel spacing 3 5 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for J J ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 6 4 9 97 9 5 15 23 12 19 14 0 16 4 16 QAM 12 9 6 90 15 0 22130 20 26 5 13 3 15 7 32 QAM 15 12 1 87 18 5 24 30 22 26 5 12 3 14 7 64 QAM 18 14 3 84 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 11 3 12 7 128 QAM 21 17 2 83 23 5 30 30 28 26 5 9 3 8 7 256 QAM 24 19 7 81 26 0 33 30 31 26 5 5 3 7 7 ver 2 1 RAy2 17 Channel spacing 7 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for J J ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 12 8 5 95 8 5 15 23 12 19 20 0 22 4 16 QAM 24 17 2 88 15 0 22 30 20 26 5 18 3 19 7 32 QAM 30 22 1 85 18 5 24 37 22 33 16 2 18 6 64 QAM 36 29 7 81 21 5 29 37 26 33 14 2 16 6 128 QAM 42 34 7 79 25 0 32 37 30 33 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 49 39 7 77 26 0 33 37 31 33 10 2 12 6 ver 2 1 206 RAy2 Mic
2. 9 Power grounding and connections gm PoE Eth AC 230 V Seal unit interfaces with bushings and plugs 11 Antenna alignment Hint Set QPSK CS 7 MHz max TX power Step by step alignment see user manual Best RSS minimum voltage in range 0 2 V Units must be grounded ver 1 7 For surge protection see user manual RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 9 List of documentation List of documentation User manuals m Microwave Link RAy2 this document User manual RAy2 10 RAy2 11 RAy2 17 RAy2 24 m Microwave Link RAy11 17 24 User manual RAy11 RAy17 RAy24 m Microwave Link RAy1 0 User manual RAy10 Datasheets m RAy2 Datasheet m RAy Datasheet m RAy SCADA Backbone Application notes m RAy Application notes Contents of the box 2pc RAy2 2 pc Cable bushing set connectors 1 pc Grease marked SILIKONOVE MAZIVO http Awww racom eu eng products m ray17 index html http Awww racom eu eng products m ray index html http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 00_letaky datasheet_RAY2_en pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 00_letaky datasheet_RAY_en pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free eng OO letaky leaflet RAY scada en pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free cz 01 ray RAy AppNote en pdf 10 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 1 RAy2 Microwave
3. RAy2 24 Bandwidth 14 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 87 5 MHz duplex spacing range 66 5 182 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 18M200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24128 5 24142 5 24069 0 24156 5 24083 0 24170 5 24097 0 24184 5 24111 0 24198 5 24125 0 24212 5 24139 0 24226 5 24153 0 24240 5 24167 0 Ch No Lower MHz Ch No 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24072 5 24076 0 24079 5 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24170 5 24174 0 Upper MHz 24125 0 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24216 0 24219 5 24223 0 24230 0 24233 5 24237 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 229 Technical parameters TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 84 MHz Bandwidth 28 MHz duplex spacing range 70 168 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 18M200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz RAy2 24 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24
4. 5 Finally you have to Confirm Security Exception If the Apply button is not active it is necessary to perform step No 1 and restart web browser Internet Explorer may give following message There is a problem with this website s security certificate Choose Continue to this website not recommended The address line gives you status information Certificate Error This inconvenience is caused by impossibility to create security certificate valid for list of user selected IP addresses 258 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Unit block diagrams Appendix H Unit block diagrams Eth1 Etho SWITCH CPU USB Unit overview CPU Fig H 1 Block diagram of the unit Switch and connected ports Port Port Eth py SWITCH PHY Poa Eth2 piy Etna CPU CPU CPU L2 switching block Ingress Egress l Fig H 2 Switch and connected ports Other schemes processing of framework Menu PIRL Menu Advanced RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 259 Index A accessories 28 ACM 70 address default 8 IP 72 IP in RAy 39 MAC 68 address IP PC Windows 7 251 PC Windows 8 253 PC Windows XP 249 alarms 80 antenna dimensions 26 247 directing 57 assembly 42 lubrication 45 49 ATPC 70 ATU 128 authorization 168 B backup 142 bandwidth 70 box contens 10 C calculation link 12 CLI 159 165 configuration 62 link 40 connectors location 22 moun
5. 10709 875 11239 875 10820 125 11350 125 10937 375 11467 375 11051 125 11581 125 10711 625 11241 625 10821 875 11351 875 10939 125 11469 125 11052 875 11582 875 10713 375 11243 375 10823 625 11353 625 10940 875 11470 875 11054 625 11584 625 10715 125 11245 125 10825 375 11355 375 10942 625 11472 625 11056 375 11586 375 10716 875 11246 875 10827 125 11357 125 10944 375 11474 375 11058 125 11588 125 10718 625 11248 625 10828 875 11358 875 10946 125 11476 125 11059 875 11589 875 10720 375 11250 375 10830 625 11360 625 10947 875 11477 875 11061 625 11591 625 10722 125 11252 125 10832 375 11362 375 10949 625 11479 625 11063 375 11593 375 10723 875 11253 875 10834 125 11364 125 10951 375 11481 375 11065 125 11595 125 10725 625 11255 625 10835 875 11365 875 10953 125 11483 125 11066 875 11596 875 10727 375 11257 375 10837 625 11367 625 10954 875 11484 875 11068 625 11598 625 10729 125 11259 125 10839 375 11369 375 10956 625 11486 625 11070 375 11600 375 10730 875 11260 875 10841 125 11371 125 10958 375 11488 375 11072 125 11602 125 10732 625 11262 625 10842 875 11372 875 10960 125 11490 125 11073 875 11603 875 10734 375 11264 375 10844 625 11374 625 10961 875 11491 875 11075 625 11605 625 10736 125 11266 125 10846 375 11376 375 10963 625 11493 625 11077 375 11607 375 10737 875 11267 875 10848 125 11378 125 10965 375 11495 375 11079 125 11609 125 10739 625 11269 625 10849 875 11379 875 10967
6. C gt 80 Temperature inside the unit on the modem board Voltage min V 40 Lower threshold of supply voltage Voltage max V gt 60 Upper threshold of supply voltage There is the same SNMP trap same OID both for Voltage min and max RSS dBm 80 Received Signal Strength SNR dB 10 Signal to Noise Ratio BER 10e Bit Error Rate registered at the receiving end instantaneous value Net bitrate Mbps 0 The system warning is generated when the current transfer capacity of radio channel is lower than the threshold set in this parameter Air link down ticked Interruption of radio link 80 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Eth link down Corresponding user Eth link Eth1 Eth2 on station interrupted NOTE The EthX link system alarm can only be activated if this alarm is Enabled When the alarm is not Enabled the EthX link alarm on Status screen is always OK regardless of the current status of the Eth ernet link RF power fail Loss of transmit power not applicable for RAy2 17 neither RAy2 24 Alarms Status Status Local Unit A 14 22 QE Peer Unit B 1 Link settings Status Acknowledge Config General Local Peer MN Inside temperature Alo Cisoverimtao C V Service access Voltage min OK OK gt Alarms Voltage max OK OK Switch settings RSS 732 dBm is under limit 70 dBm eee Status E wis BER OK OK Interface Net bitrate OK OK Air link OK OK Advanced Eth1 link disabled do
7. 5 1 4 Menu Maintenance Feature keys The firmware of the microwave link is capable of controlling the maximum user data speed The default user speed without the feature key is the minimum for the respective hardware unit The feature key to assign the maximum user data speed should be installed prior to physical installation For further details see the section called Feature keys 5 2 Basic link configuration Default radio parameters depend on the specific type of link and the specific channel allocation table Channels are typically set in the lower part of the band the smallest bandwidth QPSK modulation and low power Both units in the pair should be capable of immediate communication If it is possible to work with these radio parameters at the installation location the link can be activated On an operating link the required operating parameters can then be set up If a change in the parameters is necessary it is done in the menu Link settings Radio and saved by clicking Apply This applies when working on both units simultaneously ifthey are connected otherwise each unit is configured individually When configuring units individually pay attention to correct settings of duplex pair for channels TX and RX For example if one station has TX channel L1 then the second station must also have the channel RX L1 5 3 Link test Verify the functionality of the radio link Switch in screen Status Brief e Status Ba
8. Note It is always better not to install the microwave unit directly under the lightning conductor holders There is lower probability of unit being polluted by birds It is necessary to install the Ethernet lead so that there is no excessive mechanical stress applied on the connector bushing Fig 6 37 Example of a correct lead installation 56 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Installation 6 5 Start up Connect a power supply to the installed FOD unit and connect the configuration PC Use an internet browser such as Mozilla Firefox to enter the configuration menu 6 5 1 Noise on the site This is particularly true for installation of links working in free bands where the user has no secured frequency Analyse the level of noise in the individual channels using the spectrum analyzer under Tools Live data Frequency spectrum analyzer If necessary adjust the choice of working channel on the basis of the results While doing so respect the rule that in one location all units emit a signal in the Upper part of the range and receive it in the Lower part of the range or the other way round A transmitter must not be installed in the part of the spectrum where other units function as receivers 6 5 2 Directing antennas If it is possible use a narrow channel low modulation and high power for the first antenna directing alignment Working on both ends of the link simultaneously is favourable Connect a voltm
9. Set TX modulation QPSK to get the highest possible sensitivity Set RF power according to selected antenna and according to individual frequency licence Set the output power as high as possible Set a new users access passwords Record the access parameters from the Service access menu especially the IP addresses Restart by interrupting the power supply to verify that the parameters are stored correctly and the link works After this preparation phase you can continue to install your devices in a working environment RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 41 Installation 6 Installation 6 1 Line of sight test Before you install the device to a mast tube verify visually that the view in the direction of the remote unit is unobstructed Line of sight considerations Free Fresnel zones Signal needs space wider than the diameter of the antenna Trees at the lower end of the Fresnel zone They will be taller in a few years Possible building development Objects in the close proximity of the antenna such as edges of other antennas their mounting racks edges of the roof 6 2 Antenna mounting 6 2 1 Mounting methods Mounting on the mast tube can be achieved by o right side mounting or o left side mounting Mounting the FOD unit for antenna polarization can be achieved using o horizontal RX polarization mounting or o vertical RX polarization mounting In both cases mount the unit with the connectors fac
10. The formula for the CIR in bits per second is as follows CIR a BRF BI Where a is constant which is 12 500 000 for Accounted bytes frame and is 100 000 000 for Accounted bytes layer1 BRF is Bucket Rate factor and Bl is Bucket increment The Burst allocation BA is dependent of the Bucket increment the Committed Burst Size limit and the Excess Burst Size limit The formula for the BA is as follows BA 8 EBS CBS BI Where EBS is the Excess Burst Size limit CBS is the Committed Burst Size limit and BI is the Bucket increment The Burst allocation size should be less than switch internal memory which is 1Mb CBS min The minimum value for the CBS limit is related to the maximum frame size and Bucket increment The CBS limit should always be bigger than the CBS min The calculation for CBS min is as follows CBS min BI MaxFrameSize bytes Where BI is the Bucket increment If the CBS limit is lower than this value i e to allow a large burst then an ingress stream composed of maximum sized frames may exceed the Committed Information Rate It is for this reason that we recommend the CBS limit value always stays above the CBS min value Also the CBS limit should never exceed the EBS limit EBS limit Excess Burst Size limit The EBS limit should always be bigger than CBS limit It is recommended that the EBS limit be set to 16777200 CBS limit Committed Burst Size limit This indicates the committed informat
11. p4 Eth2 total 0 Oo00O0OO0O0aJ 90 10o SO O A A SS AJO OoOo SO Y SO SA Received and transmitted di gt Configuration Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Register dump RSTP p5 CPU p6 Air total diff total diff 209262809 0 265826817 0 0 0 0 0 1538882 0 1546810 0 8650 0 254969 0 306 0 159405 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 265818145 0 209262681 0 0 0 0 0 1546741 0 1538881 0 254969 0 8650 0 159405 0 306 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40510 0 60640 0 199507 0 199507 0 1777401 0 1777452 0 1282616 0 1282621 0 120168 0 120180 0 111974 0 111974 0 17287 0 17287 0 Refresh Difference The Remote Network MONitoring RMON MIB was developed by the IETF to support monitoring and protocol analysis of LANs RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 85 Configuration Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 The Internal switch port RMON counters These counters provide a set of Ethernet statistics for frames received on ingress and t
12. 32 44 20log f 20log D 32 44 20l0g17 2 10 20log4 129 1 dB Step 3a Rain attenuation For 99 99 availability in rain zone B the rain rate is Ro 91732 see Fig 2 1 For f 17 GHz k 0 06146 a 1 0949 k 20 06797 a 1 0137 Vertical polarization Yro o1 ky R91 0 07 32 Horizontal polarization Yro o1 Kh Roo 0 06 32 1 01 2 2 32 dB km gt for 4km distance 9 3 dB 1 09 2 62 dB km gt for 4km distance 10 5 dB Step 3b Attenuation due to multipath propagation We have to find required fade margin for reliability of the link 99 99 percent Path inclination _ h h _ 295 320 d 4 The percentage of time that fade depth A dB is exceeded in the average worst month is calculated as Po Kkd 1 zgl 4 Q0 00067h A 10 Po 10 59 909 6900 498 6 25 9947 2994 Q0 032 10 0 00067 x295 A 10 6 25mrad Ep Po 0 022871x10 0 08 For reliability 99 99 is P 0 01 we get exponential function for A A 0 19765 10log 0 01 0 022871 3 4 dB The minimum fade margin required to suppress multipath fading on this link would be 4 dB Step 4 Choice of Tx power and antennas Step 5 and Link budget calculation Calculation in steps 3a and 3b determines the minimum fade margin required for stable link operation as 11 dB rain attenuation is dominant If you use the maximum performance of antenna with dia meter of 30 cm complete the radio formula as follows PR Pr Gy Gp FSL 5 32
13. 87 7 5 12 23 10 19 26 0 28 4 16 QAM 198 1160 2 80 15 0 19 30 17 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 247 5 202 7 76 18 5 24 33 22 29 15 5 17 9 64 QAM 297 256 9 73 21 5 27 34 25 30 14 14 16 1 128QAM 346 5 303 7 69 25 0 30 37 28 33 10 3 12 1 256 QAM 396 337 7 67 26 5 33 40 30 36 8 10 10 7 ver 2 1 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 56 MHz TO ACCP operation RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Raw User 6 Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 85 8 85 10 0 13 23 11 19 24 0 26 4 16 QAM 198 169 9 78 16 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 247 5 206 2 74 19 0 25 33 23 29 14 5 15 9 64 QAM 297 268 1 70 22 5 29 34 26 30 9 4 11 1 128QAM 346 5 309 0 67 25 5 32 35 29 32 8 5 10 8 256 QAM 396 358 9 64 27 5 35 43 32 39 7 10 8 4 ver 2 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 191 Technical parameters 10 4 3 Nominal frequencies duplex 490 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz Bandwidth 1 75 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_490_defaul
14. 9 6 89 15 0 22 30 20 26 5 13 3 15 7 32 QAM 15 12 1 86 18 5 24 30 22 26 5 12 1 3 14 7 64 QAM 18 14 3 85 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 11 3 12 7 128 QAM 21 17 2 83 23 5 30 30 26 26 5 9 3 8 7 256 QAM 24 19 7 80 26 0 33 40 31 36 7 10 6 4 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 7 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 12 85 94 8 5 15 23 12 19 20 0 22 1 4 16 QAM 24 17 2 87 15 0 22 30 20 26 5 18 3 19 7 32 QAM 30 22 1 84 18 5 24 33 22129 16 5 18 9 64 QAM 36 29 7 80 21 5 29 34 26 30 14 3 16 7 128 QAM 42 34 7 78 25 0 32 37 30 33 12 1 2 14 6 256 QAM 49 39 7 76 26 0 33 40 31 36 10 0 12 4 ver 2 4 178 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 10 Channel spacing 14 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3dB 1 dB 3dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared
15. Member VLAN Table While enabled the Unicast frames with the management CPU DA can go from the Eth1 and Eth2 ports in to the CPU port The static record with the CPU DA in the ATU table has to be configured it is pre configured by default The In Chip Port based VLAN Table contains parameters used to restrict the output ports to which an input port can send frames These parameters VLANTable bits are used for all frames except for MGMT frames even if 802 1q is enabled on this port These parameters restrict where a port can send frames to unless a VLANTunnel frame is being received If ForceMap Learning is enabled these parameters indicate which port or ports all frames that ingress this port are sent to overriding the mapping from the address database The default setting prevents sending frames from Eth1 to Eth2 and vice versa This is very important for separating different networks e g different customers connected to separate user ports The Link authorization guard affects the user data flow through the Air channel When the Link authorization guard is enabled the user Ethernet ports to Air port connection control is disabled Parameter status of user Ethernet to Air port connection changes dynamically according to Link authorization status 122 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration STU Status Local RAy2 17L 08 51 Link Ok Peer RAy2 1 Link settings menm VLAN STU VTU ATU settin
16. O RACOM s r o Accessories SET RAY2 EXT35 e gt Cable bushing lengthening PG21 35 mm O ring O ring Power supply DC SET RAY2 EXT F50 Cable bushing lengthening PG21 Flexi 50cm i gt orig partno LPA6 23N 0 5m RKG 23P21N PWS AC DC AD 55B RKF 23P21N 2xORC 23 flat ring FSN P21 m B flat ring T Orig part no AD 55B e FOD unit power supply 50 W 24 V UPS Function MeanWell Datasheet Power supply PoE PWR POE36U 1AT Orig part no POE36U 1AT FOD unit power supplies 30 W PoE adapters 1x Eth Input 100 to 240 VAC Output 56 V 33 6 W Phihong Datasheet AC PWR POE36D 1AT orig part no POE36D 1AT Input 36 to 72 yDC 1 2 A Output 56 V 33 6 W Phihong Datasheet DC Power supply PoE 4x Eth PWR POE125U 4AT N orig part no POE125U 4AT x FOD unit power supply 4x 33 W 4x Eth Phihong Datasheet http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi PWS AC DC AD 55B pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi PWR POE36U 1AT pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi PWR POE36D 1AT pdf http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi PWR POE125U 4AT N pdf RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 31 Accessories Power supply holder HOL POE PHI 1A 1x Eth PoE power supply DIN rail mountable HOL POE PHI 4A 4x Eth PoE power supply 19 Rack
17. Open the Start menu Settings Network Connections Local Area Connection Inthe window Local Area Connection select Properties Another window opens Select Internet Protocol TCP IP and click Properties I Local Area Connection Properties i 21 x General Authentication Advanced Connect using ss SiS 900 Based PCI Fast Ethemet Ad This connection uses the following items 23005 Packet Scheduler A M Network Monitor Driver ivi 4 b Install Uninstall Properties Another window opens On the General tab select Use the following IP address Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties N 2 x General Alternate Configuration If this computer is used on more than one network enter the alternate IP settings below C Automatic private IP address User configured IP address 192 168 169 160 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway y E Enter IP Address IP 192 168 169 160 e Set Subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 Click OK to acknowledge these settings and close all windows RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 249 IP address in the PC Windows XP Checking the IP address in the PC In Windows XP proceed in the following manner Interconnect the configured unit and PC with an Ethernet cable Open the Start menu and click Run Enter command cmd Enter command ipconfig and read the PC IP address and mask C Documents and Settings demo
18. The port or ports that this DA MAC address is associated with is determined by the Port association parameter below Use this parameter to ensure the proper unit management CPU is accessed when two units are connected in trunk Mask of ports associated with this MAC address Add a new ATU database entry Press the Edit Copy button to open the configuration dialog of the selected ATU database record NOTE Should the Primary key value be modified the other record identified by the entered Primary key is added if it doesn t exist yet or modified if it exists already Delete the selected ATU database record Delete the whole ATU database and create default record s use default Flush Delete all except static ATU database records non static 134 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Status Local RAy2 17L 07 24 Link Ok Peer RAy2 1 Link settings dcs VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Radio Add ATU entry FID P lo Service access MAC A 00 02 29 9c 26 09 Alarms Label Switch settings Entry state dynamic M Status Use MAC priority Interface MAC priority 0 QoS Trunk member Advanced Trunk Id 0 Tools Port association Maintenance p2 p4 Eth2 Live data p5 CPU History p6 Air J Logs Programs Help Apply Cancel Fig 7 39 Menu Switch settings Advanced ATU edit RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 1
19. cli link key load t b f file cli link key apply t b RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 169 Troubleshooting 9 Troubleshooting Polarization incorrect Install the unit with the correct horizontal or vertical polarization The arrow mark placed just next to the Status LED indicates the unit RX polarization When the arrow is perpendicular to the earth the unit receives a signal in vertical polarization When the arrow is parallel to the earth the unit receives a signal in horizontal polarization The connectors must point downward at an angle The link cannot be established Start with the most resilient configuration This configuration depends on the type of unit We re commend using the narrowest available bandwidth e g 3 5 MHz the lowest modulation level QPSK and maximum available output power TX and RX channels must be the same as the RX and TX channels in the remote unit When the connection has been established and the antennas have been directed proceed with operation parameters Units operating in licensed bands RAy2 10 RAy2 11 are mounted with the same RX polarization the polarization indication arrows show the same polarization on both units Units working in the bands equipped with RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 units must be mounted with opposite polarization one with RX horizontal polarization horizontal arrow and the second with RX vertical polarization vertical arrow Acce
20. if pre D42 VALID pre true then error VID D42 VID is used cli nw get vtu D42 VID exit 6 fi D42 VALID cli nw get stu 1 sed n s valid 1 p if pre D42 VALID pre false then info Creating STU entry with SID 1 cli nw set stu 1 label D42 auto port state disabled disabled forwarding disabled disabled forwarding forwarding if ne 0 then die Failed to create STU entry fi fi info Creating service V D42 NAMEN with VID D42 VID cli nw set vtu SD42 VID label D42 NAME fid 0 sid 1 pri override true priority 5 gt policy false member tag unmodify unmodify tag unmodify not member not member unmodify if ne 0 then die Failed to create service D42 NAME with VID D42 VID fi RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 161 Configuration 7 7 Help Status Local RAy2 17L 07 29 Link settings Hel General EN Radio CLI help visible Service access Third party documentation 7 Ms Introduction Switch settings Status bar Status Status Link settings gt General Interface gt Radio Qos gt Service access gt Services gt USB accessories Advanced gt Users Tools gt Alarms gt Status Maintenance gt Acknowledge i gt Config Live data Switch settings gt Status gt Port status History gt RMON counters Logs gt Queue allocation gt Register dump Programs gt
21. 10771 125 11301 125 10881 375 11411 375 10998 625 11528 625 11112 375 11642 375 10772 875 11302 875 10883 125 11413 125 11000 375 11530 375 11114125 11644 125 10774 625 11304 625 10884 875 11414 875 11002 125 11532 125 11115 875 11645 875 10776 375 11306 375 10886 625 11416 625 11003 875 11533 875 11117 625 11647 625 10778 125 11308 125 10888 375 11418 375 11005 625 11535 625 11119 375 11649 375 10779 875 11309 875 10890 125 11420 125 11007 375 11537 375 11121 125 11651 125 10781 625 11311 625 10891 875 11421 875 11009 125 11539 125 11122 875 11652 875 10783 375 11313 375 10893 625 11423 625 11010 875 11540 875 11124 625 11654 625 10785 125 11315 125 10895 375 11425 375 11012 625 11542 625 11126 375 11656 375 10786 875 11316 875 10897 125 11427 125 11014 375 11544 375 11128 125 11658 125 10788 625 11318 625 10898 875 11428 875 11016 125 11546 125 11129 875 11659 875 10790 375 11320 375 10900 625 11430 625 11017 875 11547 875 11131 625 11661 625 10792 125 11322 125 10902 375 11432 375 11019 625 11549 625 11133 375 11663 375 10793 875 11323 875 10904 125 11434 125 11021 375 11551 375 11135 125 11665 125 10795 625 11325 625 10905 875 11435 875 11023 125 11553 125 11136 875 11666 875 10797 375 11327 375 10907 625 11437 625 11024 875 11554 875 11138 625 11668 625 10799 125 11329 125 10909 375 11439 375 11026 625 11556 625 11140 375 11670 375 10800 875 11330 875 10911 125 11441 125 110
22. 10854 25 10857 75 10861 25 10864 75 10868 25 10871 75 10875 25 10878 75 10882 25 10885 75 10889 25 10892 75 10896 25 10899 75 10903 25 10906 75 10910 25 10913 75 10917 25 10920 75 10924 25 10927 75 10931 25 10934 75 10938 25 10941 75 10945 25 10948 75 10952 25 10955 75 10959 25 10962 75 10966 25 11330 25 11333 75 11337 25 11340 75 11344 25 11347 75 11351 25 11354 75 11358 25 11361 75 11365 25 11368 75 11372 25 11375 75 11379 25 11382 75 11386 25 11389 75 11393 25 11396 75 11400 25 11403 75 11407 25 11410 75 11414 25 11417 75 11421 25 11424 75 11428 25 11431 75 11435 25 11438 75 11442 25 11445 75 11449 25 11452 75 11456 25 10938 25 10941 75 10945 25 10948 75 10952 25 10955 75 10959 25 10962 75 10966 25 10969 75 10973 25 10976 75 10980 25 10983 75 10987 25 10990 75 10994 25 10997 75 11001 25 11004 75 11008 25 11011 75 11015 25 11018 75 11022 25 11025 75 11029 25 11032 75 11036 25 11039 75 11043 25 11046 75 11050 25 11053 75 11057 25 11060 75 11064 25 11428 25 11431 75 11435 25 11438 75 11442 25 11445 75 11449 25 11452 75 11456 25 11459 75 11463 25 11466 75 11470 25 11473 75 11477 25 11480 75 11484 25 11487 75 11491 25 11494 75 11498 25 11501 75 11505 25 11508 75 11512 25 11515 75 11519 25 11522 75 11526 25 11529 75 11533 25 11536 75 11540 25 11543 75 11547 25 11550 75 11554 25 11067 75 11071 25 11074 75 11078 25
23. 11081 75 11085 25 11088 75 11092 25 11095 75 11099 25 11102 75 11106 25 11109 75 11113 25 11116 75 11120 25 11123 75 11127 25 11130 75 11134 25 11137 75 11141 25 11144 75 11148 25 11151 75 11155 25 11158 75 11162 25 11165 75 11169 25 11172 75 11176 25 11179 75 11183 25 Bandwidth 3 5 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_490_default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_490_default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz h No Lower MHz Upper MHz 11557 75 11561 25 11564 75 11568 25 11571 75 11575 25 11578 75 11582 25 11585 75 11589 25 11592 75 11596 25 11599 75 11603 25 11606 75 11610 25 11613 75 11617 25 11620 75 11624 25 11627 75 11631 25 11634 75 11638 25 11641 75 11645 25 11648 75 11652 25 11655 75 11659 25 11662 75 11666 25 11669 75 11673 25 ver 2 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 193 Technical parameters TX channel nominal frequencies Be i Naa Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz Bandwidth 7 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfot1 A 490 default 14 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 14 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10712 5 11202 5 10943 5 11433 5 10719 5 11209 5 10950 5 11440 5 10726 5 11216 5 10957 5 11447 5 10
24. 3 14 7 32 QAM 130 106 4 78 5 18 5 24 33 22129 10 5 13 9 64 QAM 156 135 0 75 5 21 5 28 34 26 30 6 4 9 1 128QAM 182 161 7 71 5 25 0 30 40 28 36 3 10 6 7 256 QAM 208 185 2 68 5 26 5 33 43 31 39 0 10 3 6 ver 2 2 190 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 40 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 68 50 1 88 7 5 12 33 10 29 22 4 24 8 16 QAM 136 110 0 81 15 0 19 33 17 29 18 4 21 8 32 QAM 170 139 2 77 18 5 24 33 21 29 16 4 19 8 64 QAM 204 176 5 74 21 5 27 133 25 29 14 4 16 8 128QAM 238 211 4 70 25 0 30 37 28 33 10 4 12 8 256 QAM 272 232 1 68 26 5 33 40 30 36 8 0 10 4 ver 2 1 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 56 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 72 9
25. 9 64 QAM 297 268 1 70 22 5 29 35 26 32 9 5 11 8 128 QAM 346 5 309 0 67 25 5 32 35 29 32 8 5 10 8 256 QAM 396 358 9 64 27 5 35 35 32132 7 1 5 8 8 ver 2 1 208 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 6 3 Nominal frequencies RAv2 17 TX channel nominal frequencies y Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex sp 73 5 MHz Bandwidth 3 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 189 MHz Freq table rcinfo17 default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 17168 0 no more channels 17171 5 17175 0 17105 0 17178 5 17108 5 17182 0 17112 0 17185 5 17115 5 17189 0 17119 0 17192 5 17122 5 17196 0 17126 0 17199 5 17129 5 17203 0 17133 0 17206 5 17136 5 17210 0 17140 0 17213 5 17143 5 17217 0 17147 0 17220 5 17150 5 17224 0 17154 0 17227 5 17157 5 17231 0 17161 0 17234 5 17164 5 17238 0 17168 0 17241 5 17171 5 17245 0 17175 0 17248 5 17178 5 17252 0 17182 0 17255 5 17185 5 17259 0 17189 0 17262 5 17192 5 17266 0 17196 0 17269 5 17199 5 17273 0 17203 0 17276 5 17206 5 17280 0 17210 0 17283 5 17213 5 17287 0 17217 0 17290 5 17220 5 17294 0 17224 0 17227 5 17231 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 209 Technical parameters RAy2 17 Bandwidth 7 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex
26. Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L22 240795 U46 24163 5 L38 24135 5 U62 24219 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24030 5 24034 0 24037 5 24041 0 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24069 0 24072 5 24076 0 24083 0 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24167 0 24170 5 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24184 5 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24212 5 24216 0 ver 2 1 226 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 7 4 Nominal frequencies 24 05 24 25 GHz RAy2 24 Bandwidth 3 5 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 189 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24055 0 24128 5 24058 5 24132 0 24062 0 24135 5 24065 5 24139 0 24069 0 24142 5 24072 5 24146 0 24076 0 24149 5 24079 5 24153 0 24083 0 24156 5 24086 5 24160 0 24090 0 24163 5 24093 5 24167 0 24097 0 24170 5 24100 5 24174 0 24104 0 24177 5 24107 5 24181 0 24111 0 24184 5 24114 5 24188 0 24118 0 24191 5 24121 5 24195 0 24
27. Connectors assembly The FOD communication unit can be connected to the user network by metallic or fibre Ethernet cable The unit is equipped with those connectors ETH1 POE Gigabit metallic Ethernet port This port can power the unit with any Power over Ethernet power source working according to IEEE 802 3at standard ETH2 Slot for user exchangeable SFP module A wide range of optical modules is available Both single or dual mode transceivers can be used The SFP module with metallic RJ45 interface can be used as well Please see the Important notice The SFP status LED is located just next to the slot P DC power connector HW button for service purposes S USB service connector RSS voltage output connectors ETH1 POE ETH2 Fig 6 24 FOD communication unit connectors Important AN Before connecting the FOD communication unit to the supply to the user network the FOD unit must be grounded according to Section 6 4 Grounding 50 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Installation Assembly procedure Fig 6 26 Bushing incl lengthening and connector assembly Puton the cable the nut No 1 rubber sealing No 2 bushing No 3 and O ring No 4 Attach the appropriate connector No 5 to the cable Plug the connector No 5 into the RAy2 unit e Screw the bushing No 3 with the sealing O ring into the RAy2 unit Move the rubber sealing No 2 along the cable to fit in the bushing
28. It becomes significantly larger as the distance travelled increases gt 10 Km Horizontal polarization causes greater rain attenuation than vertical polarization Rain outage increases dramatically with frequency and path length RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 13 Implementation Notes 165 150 120 60 30 150 180 150 30 t n in NON oA 225 te Y i 30 M y s y y Y 3 Y 60 165 150 30 is 0 30 180 150 Ajmmm B i2 mmm E 15 mmn D 19 mm h E 22 mm h F 28 mm h E30 mmn H 32 mmn J 35mmth k 145 mm h GB 115 mmih 42 mmh iio mmh M 63 mmm N 95 mmn P Fig 2 1 Rain zone map based on Rec ITU R PN 837 1 Rain attenuation can be calculated using ITU R outage model which consists of the following Obtain the rain rate Ro 94 exceeded for 0 01 per cent of the time with an integration time of 1 min Ro 91 values are defined for 15 rain zones and different time percentages and they are given in ITU R Recommendation P 837 Tab 2 1 Rain rate R mm h ITU R P 837 inks A B IC DI EI FIG H JIK Limi N pla 10 01 05 07 21 06 17 3 2 8 15 2 4 5 1
29. RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Some applications may require the top priority queue or the top two priority queues to be in a fixed priority mode while the lower queues work in the weighted approach All scheduling modes are selectable on a per port basis The port scheduling mode can be one of the following values weighted RRB Use a weighted round robin queuing scheme strict pri 3 Use Strict for priority 3 and use weighted round robin for prior ities 2 1 and O strict pri 3 2 Use Strict for priorities 3 and 2 and use weighted round robin for priorities 1 and O strict Use a Strict priority scheme for all priorities Speed guard The speed guard controls automatically the Egress data rate shaping according to available capacity of the Air channel The Air channel capacity check and the Egress shaping adjustment takes place approx once per 50 ms Count mode Egress rate limiting count mode This parameter is used to control which bytes in the transmitted frames are counted for egress rate limiting as follows frame The egress rate limiting is done based on frame count fps as opposed to the byte count kbps of the packet layer 1 Preamble 8bytes Frame s DA to CRC IFG inter frame gap 12 bytes layer 2 Frame s DA to CRC layer 3 Frame s DA to CRC 18 4 if the frame is tagged Only one tag is counted even if the frame contains more than one tag A frame is considered tagged if the egress fr
30. RAy2 Microwave Link 125 Configuration Use VID priority VID priority VID policy Member tag Add entry Edit Delete Flush all VID Priority Override This parameter is used to indicate that frames assigned with this VID can have their priority overridden with the VID priority value see below if the port s VTU priority override parameters is enabled to do so See VTU priority override for more details VID Priority override value when enabled by the Use VID priority parameter see above Used for priority override on ingressing frames Enabling a priority on a VID will override the frame s priority only if the port s VTU priority override parameter is enabled to do so This parameter is used to indicate that frames assigned with this VID can have Layer 2 Policy actions applied to it if the port s Policy VTU menu Advanced Monitoring Policy Policy is enabled to do so This parameters is used to indicate which ports are members of the VLAN i e with the given VID and if these VLANs frames should be tagged or untagged or unmodified when exiting the port as follows egress un Portis a member of this VLAN and frames are to egress unmodified modified egress un Portis a member of this VLAN and frames are to egress Untagged tagged egress Port is a member of this VLAN and frames are to egress Tagged tagged not member Portis not a member of this VLAN The result is that frames assigned with this VID can not egr
31. RSTP Help gt Interface gt Port gt Port advanced gt PIRL gt Egress queue gt QoS gt 802 1p gt DSCP Advanced gt VLAN gt STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP gt Trunk gt Backup gt Feature keys gt Firmware gt gt v V V V V V Tools Maintenance Radio adaptation Restart gt Livedata gt Bar indicators gt RX constellation diagram gt Frequency spectrum analyzer History Logs gt Programs gt Ping gt CLI Help Fig 7 57 Help menu 162 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Help from Help menu The Help screen displays contents of the embedded help The help text is displayed in the whole con figuration window The text structure corresponds to individual configuration screens Every item of this Help opens the specific help menu CLI help visible Allows displaying of the CLI help with examples Third party Allows displaying references to the third party documentation e g internal switch documentation documentation Help from configuration menu Clicking the name of the specific parameter in the configuration menu brings up the help belonging to this parameter The help text is displayed in the pop up window Status Local RAy2 17L 07 33 Link settings Radi General E gt Radio Local Peer Radio type L U Service access Polarization vertical horizontal Alarms Bandwidth MHz 3 5 MHz v 3 5 MHz Switch settings Hints Status T
32. f in accordance with Commission Decision 2000 299 EC Nove Mesto na Morave 15 of March 2015 Jiri Hruska CEO A BAS 4 7 fC fa HS C y RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic www racom eu Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu Cc ver 1 3 Fig 11 2 Declaration of Conformity for RAy2 11 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 243 Safety environment licensing EP RACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity RAy2 17 We Manufacturer RACOM Address Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic VAT CZ46343423 declare under our own responsibility that the product Product RAy2 17 Purpose of use Short Range Device equipment for data transmission to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the essential requirements and other relevant requirements of the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity The product is in conformity with the following standards and or other normative documents Spectrum art 3 2 EN 300 440 1 V1 6 1 EMC art 3 1 b EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 3 V1 6 1 EN 301 489 4 V2 1 1 Safety art 3 1 a EN 60950 1 ed 2 2006 A1 2010 A2 2014 A11 2009 A12 2011 Cor 1 2012 J Notified Body Opinion According to Eur
33. http Awww racom eu eng products microwave link html accessories_jirous 26 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Product 3 7 Ordering codes The proper pair from the same row of Lower and Upper units should be selected when ordering the microwave link This is not valid for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 units In such a case the same unit is used for both sides of the link Tab 3 3 Ordering codes Tvoe Frequency Ordering code did Lower GHz Upper GHz Lower unit Upper unit 10 GH 10 30 10 42 10 47 10 59 RAy2 10 LA RAy2 10 UA Z 10 125 10 325 10 475 10 675 RAy2 10 LB RAy2 10 UB 11 GH 10 695 10 970 11 185 11 460 RAy2 11 LA RAy2 11 UA Z 10 935 11 195 11 425 11 695 RAy2 11 LB RAy2 11 UB 17 GHz 17 100 17 300 RAy2 17 17 700 18 209 18 710 19 219 RAy2 18 LA RAy2 18 UA 18 GHz 18 167 18 690 19 177 19 700 RAy2 18 LB RAy2 18 UB 24 GHz 24 000 24 250 RAy2 24 ver 5 0 1 RAy2 18 not available yet The Feature keys ordering code consists of three parts RAy2 SW 360 Product type RAy2 Feature key type The SW key is available now This key unlocks the User speed to a given value The default user speed without the feature key is the minimum for the respective HW unit Feature key value In case of User speed it states Mbps Possible values 200 360 SW key possibilities valid for RAy2 10 11 17 18 24 RAy2 SW 200 User data spee
34. tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 72 9 86 7 5 12 23 10 19 26 0 28 4 16 QAM 198 160 2 79 15 0 19 30 17 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 247 5 202 7 75 18 5 24 33 22129 15 5 17 9 64 QAM 297 256 9 72 21 5 27 34 25 30 14 3 16 7 128QAM 346 5 303 7 68 25 0 30 35 28 132 10 5 12 8 256 QAM 396 337 7 66 26 5 33 40 30 36 8 0 10 4 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 56 MHz TO ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 85 8 84 10 0 13 23 11 19 24 0 26 4 16 QAM 198 169 9 77 16 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 247 5 206 2 73 19 0 25 133 23 29 14 5 15 9 64 QAM 297 268 1 69 22 5 29 34 26 30 9 3 11 7 128QAM 346 5 309 0 66 25 5 32135 29132 8 5 10 8 256 QAM 396 358 9 63 27 5 35 43 32 39 7 10 8 4 ver 2 4 180 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 3 3 Nominal frequencies band 10 30 10 59 GHz RAy2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 41 75 MHz Channel arrangements bas
35. 10603 75 10533 75 10257 25 10607 25 10537 25 10260 75 10610 75 10540 75 10264 25 10614 25 10544 25 10267 75 10617 75 10547 75 10271 25 10621 25 10551 25 10274 75 10624 75 10554 75 10278 25 10628 25 10558 25 10281 75 10631 75 10561 75 10285 25 10635 25 10565 25 10288 75 10638 75 10568 75 10292 25 10642 25 10572 25 10295 75 10645 75 ver 2 0 10157 5 10164 5 10171 5 10178 5 10185 5 10192 5 10199 5 10206 5 10213 5 10220 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 RAy2 10 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 15 10 65 GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 7 MHz CEPT ERC REC 12 05 E B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10507 5 10227 5 10577 5 10514 5 10234 5 10584 5 10521 5 10241 5 10591 5 10528 5 10248 5 10598 5 10535 5 10255 5 10605 5 10542 5 10262 5 10612 5 10549 5 10269 5 10619 5 10556 5 10276 5 10626 5 10563 5 10283 5 10633 5 10570 5 10290 5 10640 5 ver 2 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 185 Technical parameters RAy2 10 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 15 10 65 GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 14 MHz CEPT ERC REC 12 05 E 7 MHz based channels B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 0 TX channel nominal frequencies RAy2 10 xB q Band 10 15 10 65 GHz dupl
36. 125 11497 125 11080 875 11610 875 10741 375 11271 375 10851 625 11381 625 10968 875 11498 875 11082 625 11612 625 10743 125 11273 125 10853 375 11383 375 10970 625 11500 625 11084 375 11614 375 10744 875 11274 875 10855 125 11385 125 10972 375 11502 375 11086 125 11616 125 10746 625 11276 625 10856 875 11386 875 10974 125 11504 125 11087 875 11617 875 10748 375 11278 375 10858 625 11388 625 10975 875 11505 875 11089 625 11619 625 10750 125 11280 125 10860 375 11390 375 10977 625 11507 625 11091 375 11621 375 10751 875 11281 875 10862 125 11392 125 10979 375 11509 375 11093 125 11623 125 10753 625 11283 625 10863 875 11393 875 10981 125 11511 125 11094 875 11624 875 10755 375 11285 375 10865 625 11395 625 10982 875 11512 875 11096 625 11626 625 10757 125 11287 125 10867 375 11397 375 10984 625 11514 625 11098 375 11628 375 10758 875 11288 875 10869 125 11399 125 10986 375 11516 375 11100 125 11630 125 10760 625 11290 625 10870 875 11400 875 10988 125 11518 125 11101 875 11631 875 10762 375 11292 375 10872 625 11402 625 10989 875 11519 875 11103 625 11633 625 10764 125 11294 125 10874 375 11404 375 10991 625 11521 625 11105 375 11635 375 10765 875 11295 875 10876 125 11406 125 10993 375 11523 375 11107 125 11637 125 10767 625 11297 625 10877 875 11407 875 10995 125 11525 125 11108 875 11638 875 10769 375 11299 375 10879 625 11409 625 10996 875 11526 875 11110 625 11640 625
37. 158 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration CLI Web interface for executing non interactive scripts and programs Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance Local RAy2 17L 17 38 TO 5 Link Ok Ping CLI Manage custom commands Open file upload Delete all Custom commands y CLI commands cli_help fh Command cli_help Run Fig 7 56 Menu Tools Programs CLI Manage custom commands Custom com mands CLI commands Command Format of custom scripts Example of custom script Using Open file upload upload the user can upload scripts to the unit The uploaded file can be either a single shell script with extension sh e g my_script sh or package with multiple scripts with extension tar gz or tgz created using tar Delete all removes all custom scripts from the unit Custom scripts are located in home shared bin A custom script can be selected here and initial comments help is shown A CLI command can be selected here You can use cli_help for listing all CLI commands or lt command gt help to obtain detailed help on a selected command Command line for writing commands with parameters You can use any non in teractive program script according to your permissions Custom scripts must be a shell script with preamble bin sh and extension sh Blocks of lines beginning with the comment s
38. 18 3 19 7 32 QAM 30 22 1 83 18 5 24 137 22133 16 2 18 6 64 QAM 36 29 7 79 21 5 29 37 26 33 14 2 16 6 128 QAM 42 34 7 76 25 0 32 37 30 33 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 49 40 7 74 26 0 33 37 31 33 10 2 12 6 ver 1 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 217 Technical parameters RAy2 24 Channel spacing 14 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 24 19 9 91 8 5 14 23 12 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 48 38 8 84 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 60 49 1 80 18 5 26 33 23 29 17 1 5 19 9 64 QAM 72 623 77 21 5 28 137 26 33 14 2 17 1 6 128 QAM 84 73 6 73 25 0 30 37 28133 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 96 81 2 71 28 0 33 37 31 33 10 2 12 6 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Channel spacing 28 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared
39. 226 Status Netmask 24 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 255 0 Interface Gateway 192 168 141 254 192 168 141 254 QoS Management VLAN VID Protocol VID Protocol ae 15t tag 1 802 1q 1 802 1q Tools 2nd tag 4094 802 1q 4094 802 1q Maintenance Internal VLAN 2 2 Live data Local Peer Logs Web server on on v Programs CLI telnet Help CLI SSH on on v SNMP SNMP community string racom snmp racom snmp SNMP trap IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note Individual SNMP traps can be activated at Alarms gt Config LED indicators Y Y Internal link watchdog Apply Cancel Refresh Show defaults Show backup Fig 5 3 Configuration menu Link settings Service access Services RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 39 Step by step Guide 5 1 3 Menu Link Service access Users Edit enter the menu New password choose a password and enter it Confirm password enter the password again to confirm Status Local RAy2 17L 09 22 Link Ok Link settings Services USB accessories Users General Radio Local Username Group Password SSHkey Edit Service access gmin cli super Set None Edit Delete Alarms Switch settings Peer 9 Username Group Password SSH key Status admin cli_super Set None Interface Note Local user accounts can be backed up at Maintenance gt Backup Qos Advanced Add user Refresh Mirror users Tools Fig 5 4 Configuration menu Link settings Service access Services
40. 3 3 Re o HA bo A tete veta 26 O MeL 27 A ACCOSSOFLIOS a Pa XR KERALA 28 MPMeU ca A A A vive dicancacteee dobar A 28 Ay 2s Detall Siana mm 30 5 Step by step Guide a eae a ar aae aa aaa a aaa R REN RR RR RR animenin deie etaeta TE 36 5 1 Service access uses te ce E RR E ET T 37 5 1 1 Menu Link settings General oorr Itm erret Pr te tate nodu pte trei 38 5 1 2 Menu Link Service access Services ooooooococccoccconcnoncnnnnonnnoncnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 39 5 1 3 Menu Link Service access Users ssssssssssssssssssssseeeeene eere 40 5 1 4 Menu Maintenance Feature keys eeeeeseeneeeeeeene teniente 40 5 2 Basi MAK COMU IO mee T t M 40 DO bili I8Sl r O a eea a 40 X INStallAU ON rc 42 6 1 Line of sight test eet ES 42 6 2 Antenna MOI eR E 42 5 2 T MOUNT methods riss irna ti 42 6 2 2 Mounting the FOD unit on the antenna sssssseem ee 45 6 2 3 Lubrication and preservation of the antenna pivot cooccccccccccnnncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnns 49 06 2 4 Flexible waveguide eroi did 49 6 3 CORMECIONS dsselTIDIy iicet t itte cd bk oet brote arse utellus Leda a AEAN Ak mer Dedi pae epe 50 0 4 GITOUDGIPIQ eos redet eo E ATE ced ah edi nie tue Sek 52 0 5 Start Up AE RR RU FER de E TR OR FERREA tre Ert er ME Ld EUER ERE 57 0 5 1 Noise on ANE Site cere rro E rie e E red ee ee o EN XU it da 57 6 5 2 Directing a
41. 5 7 60 73 5 14 65 87 5 28 70 84 40 70 70 50 84 87 5 56 84 84 ver 2 6 RAy2 24 Band Range Unit L Unit U MHz MHz min 24 000 24 000 max 24 250 24 250 ver 1 0 216 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 7 2 Radio parameters RAy2 24 Channel spacing 3 5 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit M Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 6 49 96 9 5 15 23 12 19 14 0 16 4 16 QAM 12 9 6 89 15 0 22 30 20 26 5 13 3 15 7 32 QAM 15 12 1 86 18 5 24 30 22 26 5 12 3 14 7 64 QAM 18 14 3 83 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 11 3 12 7 128 QAM 21 17 2 79 23 5 30 30 28 26 5 9 3 8 7 256 QAM 24 19 7 77 26 0 33 30 31 26 5 5 3 7 1 7 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Channel spacing 7 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit FH Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 12 85 93 8 5 15 23 12 19 20 0 22 4 16 QAM 24 17 2 86 15 0 22130 20 26 5
42. 625 11453 625 11094 875 11584 875 10737 875 11227 875 10869 125 11359 125 10965 375 11455 375 11096 625 11586 625 10739 625 11229 625 10870 875 11360 875 10967 125 11457 125 11098 375 11588 375 10741 375 11231 375 10872 625 11362 625 10968 875 11458 875 11100 125 11590 125 10743 125 11233 125 10874 375 11364 375 10970 625 11460 625 11101 875 11591 875 10744 875 11234 875 10876 125 11366 125 10972 375 11462 375 11103 625 11593 625 10746 625 11236 625 10877 875 11367 875 10974 125 11464 125 11105 375 11595 375 10748 375 11238 375 10879 625 11369 625 10975 875 11465 875 11107 125 11597 125 10750 125 11240 125 10881 375 11371 375 10977 625 11467 625 11108 875 11598 875 10751 875 11241 875 10883 125 11373 125 10979 375 11469 375 11110 625 11600 625 10753 625 11243 625 10884 875 11374 875 10981 125 11471 125 11112 375 11602 375 10755 375 11245 375 10886 625 11376 625 10982 875 11472 875 11114 125 11604 125 10757 125 11247 125 10888 375 11378 375 10984 625 11474 625 11115 875 11605 875 10758 875 11248 875 10890 125 11380 125 10986 375 11476 375 11117 625 11607 625 10760 625 11250 625 10891 875 11381 875 10988 125 11478 125 11119 375 11609 375 10762 375 11252 375 10893 625 11383 625 10989 875 11479 875 11121 125 11611 125 10764 125 11254 125 10895 375 11385 375 10991 625 11481 625 11122 875 11612 875 10765 875 11255 875 10897 125 11387 125 10993 375 11483 375 11124 625 11614 625 10767
43. 80 9 82 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 125 102 4 78 18 5 24 33 22 29 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 150 129 8 75 21 5 28 34 26 30 12 3 15 7 128QAM 175 155 5 71 25 0 30 35 28132 9 5 12 8 256 QAM 200 170 7 69 26 5 33 40 31 36 6 0 9 4 ver 2 4 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 179 Technical parameters RAy2 10 Channel spacing 28 30 MHz ACAP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 qB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 52 38 3 88 5 7 5 12 23 10 19 15 0 17 4 16 QAM 104 84 1 81 5 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 12 3 14 7 32 QAM 130 106 4 77 5 18 5 24 33 22129 10 5 13 9 64 QAM 156 135 0 74 5 21 5 28 34 26 30 6 4 9 1 128QAM 182 161 7 70 5 25 0 30 40 28 36 3 10 6 7 256 QAM 208 185 2 67 5 26 5 33 43 31 39 0 10 3 6 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 56 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB
44. Frame sent from the port to the network can be identified by priority FPri although it is also possible to change its tag see menu VLAN Egress mode 100 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Port based ingress rate limiting see also the Functional diagram Local RAy2 17L 10 54 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17U 10 54 Port Port advanced PIRL Egress queue Port Ingress Rate Limiter Port name ld CIR estimated Bucket rate factor Bucket increment Mode Edit Delete p2Eth1 0 10 Mbps 2 20 Hoe broadcast Edit Delete p2 Eth1 1 250 Mbps 10 4 m A Edit Delete p4Eth2 0 10 Mbps 2 20 ioe broadcast Edit Delete Fig 7 25 Menu Switch settings PIRL The device supports per port TCP IP ingress rate limiting along with independent Storm prevention Port based ingress rate limiting accommodates information rates from 64 Kbps to 1 Mbps in increments of 64 Kbps from 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in increments of 1 Mbps and from 100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps in increments of 10 Mbps In addition to this the device supports Priority based ingress rate limiting A given ingress rate resource can be configured to track any of the four priority traffic types One of the popular schemes for imple menting rate limiting is a leaky bucket The way a leaky bucket scheme works is that the bucket drains tokens constantly at a rate called Committed Information Rate CIR and the bucket gets replenished with tokens whenever a frame is all
45. In filtered Total number of good frames that were filtered due to ingress switch Egress statistics counters Out octets policy rules The sum of lengths of all Ethernet frames sent from this MAC 86 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Out FCS errors The number of frames transmitted with an invalid FCS Whenever a frame is modified during transmission e g to add or remove a tag the frame s original FCS is inspected before a new FCS is added to a modified frame If the original FCS is invalid the new FCS is made invalid too and this counter is incremented Out unicasts The number of frames sent that have a Unicast destination MAC address Out multicasts The number of good frames sent that have a Multicast destination MAC address NOTE This does not include frames counted in Out broadcasts nor does it include frames counted in Out pause Out broadcasts The number of good frames sent that have a Broadcast destination MAC address Out pause The number of Flow Control frames sent Out deffered The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experi enced no collisions but are delayed because the medium was busy during the first attempt This counter is applicable in half duplex only Out collisions The number of collision events seen by the MAC not including those counted in Out Single Multiple Excessive or Late This counter is applicable in half duplex only See Auto negotiati
46. Link The microwave link RAy2 is designed as a high speed point to point wireless bridge for data transmission under the latest requirements of modern wireless transmission equipment RAy2 works with an ethernet interface and can be used in backhaul networks as well as a last mile terminal The design of microwave link RAy2 reflects effort on meeting the strictest criteria of ETSI standards particularly for durability against interference high receiver sensitivity and high output power to achieve maximum link distance The native gigabit Ethernet interface is able to cope with full speed user data throughput at low latency High availability of the link up to 99 999 is able to be achieved using hitless Adaptive coding and modulation RAy2 microwave links can also be operated as a Short Range Device SRD The link properties can be summarised as High data throughput Spectrum effeciency Robustness e Security cofiguration via http https ssh User friendly interface advanced diagnostics Key technical features see Chapter 10 Technical parameters Note aD Operation of the RAy2 xx is described in this user manual Operation of the RAy11 RAy17 and RAy24 is described in User Manual RAy11 17 24 Operation of the RAy10 is described in the RAy10 User Manual http www racom eu eng products m ray17 index html http www racom eu eng products m ray index html RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 11 Implem
47. PIRL resource Delete Press Delete to delete selected PIRL resource Add resource Press Add resource button to add another PIRL resource 102 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o PIRL resource configuration Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Local RAy2 17L 10 57 Port Port advanced Resource Port name P Id P Settings CIR estimated Burst allocation b CBS min EBS limit CBS limit Bucket rate factor Bucket increment Account discarded frames Account filtered frames Management non rate limit SA non rate limit DA non rate limit Accounted bytes EBS limit action Sampling mode Flow control de assertion Bucket type Mask operation Priority Frame type Unknown unicast Unknown multicast Broadcast Multicast Unicast Network management ARP TCP data TCP control UDP IGMP ICMP GRE IGRP L2TP Ingress monitor source Policy mirror Policy trap PIRL Egress queue p2 Eth1 v 0 v 10 Mbps 512000 204800 16777200 15497200 2 20 layer 1 v drop v empty Y traffic type v priority OR type M 00 10 20 3 Fig 7 27 Menu Switch settings PIRL Resource Each port can be assigned up to five different ingress rate resources Link Ok C
48. PoE plus IEEE 802 3at power source connected to the ETH1 POE connector Supported voltage range is 40 60 V distances up to 100 m Internal RJ45 pins wiring is o V 1 2 4 5 o V 3 6 7 8 It is possible to use all 8 pins or only 4 pins Use o either 4 5 V and 7 8 V o or 1 2 V and 3 6 V o or both simultaneously Any kind of DC power source connected to P 3 pin connector Supported voltage range is 20 60 V Important A The microwave unit doesn t support a combination of both power supplies Only one power supply can be connected at any one time RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 23 Product The internal DC power source uses galvanic separation If the galvanic separated power source is used and the DC power line needs to be grounded either positive or negative wire the middle pin of the 3 port DC connector can be used to make a connection between ground and the respective power wire see Grounding options d e If grounding is required it should only be made in one of the following ways on the DC power source side or using the 3 port DC connector plugged into the unit The next figure shows all available grounding options We recommend the use of a galvanic separated power source and no additional DC grounding see Fig 3 5 Grounding options version c a nc Feo Raya b Dc ono Ray2 c Dc TT eno RAy2 d pc tenn RAy2 e pc
49. Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 The QoS classification according to DSCP priority bits is enabled disabled Enable this parameter to force DSCP priority over 802 p When enabled the IEEE 802 1p Prefer parameter is automatically disabled Arranging individual priorities coded in DS field of IP header into selected output queue 0 3 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 113 Configuration 7 5 4 Advanced According to the Advanced menu proceeds the deciding through which port the framework should be transmitted from RAy unit The processing of framework can be observed on the diagram and in the table Table columns indicate successive steps and in the rows there is hinted the development of framework parameters DA SA Tag Frame Data CRC VLAN Def VID UW Def FID N S LLI 2 ou BG E Ingress VID id 12 bit SID override FID enabled ports egress tag state of ports according to STP time portcost CPU ATU settings MGMT multicast rules Ports Learning Hold1 SA filtr SA DA prior override port association max 8192 static dynamic items SA DA prior override trunk port Monitoring Policy mirror trap discard 8 tests gt action Fig 7 31 Advanc
50. RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 90 66 3 86 5 7 5 12 23 10 19 24 10 26 4 16 QAM 180 145 6 79 5 15 0 19 30 17 26 5 18 3 21 7 32 QAM 225 184 2 75 5 18 5 24 33 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 270 233 6 72 5 21 5 27135 25132 14 5 16 8 128 QAM 315 276 1 68 5 25 0 30 35 28 132 10 5 12 8 256 QAM 360 320 6 65 5 26 5 33 35 30 32 81 5 10 8 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Channel spacing 56 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 72 9 86 7 5 12 23 10 19 26 0 28 4 16 QAM 198 160 2 79 15 0 19 30 17 26 5 19 3 21 1 7 32 QAM 247 5 202 7 75 18 5 24 133 22129 15 5 17 9 64 QAM 297 256 9 72 21 5 27135 25132 14 5 16 8 128 QAM 346 51303 7 68 25 0 30 35 28 32 10 5 12 8 256 QAM 396 337 7 65 26 5 33 35 30 32 8 5 10 8 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Channel spacing 56 MHz TO ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declar
51. RSS reading is 170 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Troubleshooting limited Though in most situations the RSS reading accuracy is better than 2dB the absolute RSS value should not be used for accurate comparisons e g between two links Problem with https certificate See the Appendix G Https certificate Overexcited receiver A natural property of each radio receiver is to compress the signal in one of the functional blocks typically in a second receiving mixer A downside of this property is the distortion of the input signal decrease in the signal to noise ratio i e the distortion measured as SNR In extreme cases this can lead to the disintegration of the radio link due to reduced signal to noise ratio distortion Extreme limits for guaranteed availability of the RAy2 connections are o 30 dB for all channel bandwidths and fixed modulation 256QAM o 10 dB for all channel bandwidths and fixed modulation QPSK RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 171 Technical parameters 10 Technical parameters 10 1 General parameters 10 1 1 Technical parameters overview Tab 10 1 Technical parameters Type RAy2 10 RAy2 11 RAy2 17 RAy2 24 A A Band GHz 10 30 10 59 10 695 11 460 7 7 sub bands A B B E 17 1 17 3 24 0 24 25 10 125 10 675 10 935 11 695 ODU inits Unit L and U One universal uni
52. SSH NTP Web SSH NTP Refresh Start Stop RACOM Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic Tel 420 565 659 511 E mail racom racom eu Fig 7 5 Page example 64 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o 7 3 Status Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Fig 7 6 Menu Status Local RAy2 10L 06 05 Brief Detailed General LED indicators e Unit code Serial no Station name Station location Firmware version Date e Time e Inside temperature GP Voltage V e Power supply e Radio Radio type Polarization Frequency table Net bitrate Mbps Max net bitrate Mbps Bandwidth MHz TX channel GHz RX channel GHz TX modulation e TX power dBm RSS dBm e SNR dB BER Link uptime e Switch interface Egress rate limit Air gt Link mode Eth1 e Link mode Eth2 e Service access MAC address IPv4 address Management VLAN Services Radio link statistics Statistics Cleared Statistics Period Overall Link Uptime Overall Link Downtime Reliability RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link Local ASE RAy2 10 LA 10423521 RAy2 10L Local L horizontal rcinfo10 A default 6 847 Egress limit ON 359 7 MHz L3 10 311500 U3 10 479500 QPSK 0 60 7 29 6 0 00e 00 7 days 08 35 5
53. Screw the nut No 1 on bushing No 3 If you use extension ring No 6 lubricate its thread with grease Disassembly procedure Release the nut No 1 Remove the rubber sealing No 2 Unscrew the bushing No 3 with O ring No 4 and extension No 6 with O ring No 7 Remove the connector RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 51 Installation En I flat ring y A A Fig 6 27 Bushing including long lengthening All necessary parts are delivered as an accessory SET RAY2 CON B If the lengthening is needed use the extension SET RAY2 EXT35 containing the parts No 6 and No 7 or use the longer extension SET RAY2 EXT F50 The rubber sealing is delivered with three different internal diameters to fit different cable diameters The rubber is diagonally cut to enable sealing of cables with preinstalled connectors Important AN All bushings and plugs including the original plugs in the ports must be fitted with O rings and carefully tightened Failure to do so may result in moisture accessing the in ternal workings In such a situation the functionality cannot be guaranteed Before screwing extension ring part No 6 into the RAy2 housing lubricate its thread with grease When using other bushing or connector than the delivered there is a danger of bad seal or damaging the connector Interior space can be small 6 4 Grounding The lightning and overvoltage protection system example d
54. active alarms to acknowledge groups of alarms can be performed using Shift or Ctrl keys Name Alarm identification The following alarms can appear Inside temperature Voltage min Voltage max RSS SNR BER Net bitrate Air link Eth1 link Eth2 link RF power State There are three possible alarm states OK No alarm alarm is inactive or alarm disabled Ack Alarm is active and acknowledged Alarm Alarm is active and is not acknowledged From Time stamp when the alarm occured To Time stamp when the alarm expired returned to normal conditions Ack Time stamp when the alarm was acknowledged Time stamp format yyyy MM dd hh mm ss User Name login of the user who acknowledged the alarm Comment The comment field can be used to add user defined comments when alarm ac knowledge is performed Use this comment to describe important details of the alarm status The comment can be up to 50 characters long Special characters are not allowed The alarm can be acknowledged multiple times with different comments Every acknowledgement is written to the internal memory and is visible in the alarm log 82 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration 7 5 Switch settings 7 5 1 Status Port status The unit internal Ethernet switch port status Status Local Unit A 07 46 Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Link settings z cm Port status RMON counters Queue allocation Register dump RSTP i Port name p2 Eth1
55. and probably bricks your unit You should not use force mode until instructed to do so by the technical support Upgrade Use the Upgrade button to perform the firmware installation Warning Y Installing the firmware takes several minutes about 3 minutes During this time transmission of user data is interrupted Do not interrupt the power supply during firmware installation RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 147 Configuration Radio adaptation Status Local RAy2 17L 07 14 Link Ok Link settings as Backup Feature keys Firmware Radio adaptation Restart Radio Radio type Service access oer i range Alarms Frequency tables Switch settings Active rcinfo17_default 17 Status New rcinfo17_default 17 v Change Interface Warning Using the wrong frequency table can lead to violation of the corresponding telecommunications regulatic QoS Advanced Refresh Tools Maintenance Fig 7 46 Menu Tools Radio adaptation Radio type IMPORTANT Applies only for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links Hardware of these links is universal for the entire frequency band To facilitate the configuration of radio parameters units are coded for L Lower and U Upper part of the band L or U band assignment can be modified Radio type Radio unit type L Lower or U Upper part of the frequency band Use the Change button to change the radio type WARNING When the radio type is changed the Link settings menu parameters of each unit are re
56. antennas and increases the cost of creating the microwave link The following paragraphs describe the two most significant types of signal strength loss rain and multipath attenuation which are the most frequent along with free space loss Mutual relation between rain and multipath attenuation rules out the possibility that the link could be affected by both types of attenuation at the same time these types of attenuation do not add up To determine the fade margin it is necessary to calculate both rain and multipath attenuation The larger of the two types of attenuation determines the value of fade margin In areas with high precipitation rain attenuation can be expected to be more prominent By contrast links located in drier climates and little inclination will suffer more from multipath attenuation 2 1 4 Rain attenuation For frequencies of about 10 GHz rain attenuation starts to become increasingly effective Precipitation is not identical in all areas which is why ITU released a recommendation Rec ITU R PN 837 1 for splitting the world into 15 regions according to precipitation intensity see Fig 2 1 for more detail Ap pendix B Rain zone map In the areas with higher precipitation greater rain attenuation must be expected and a greater signal fade margin must be established see the calculation of link availability The following properties are inherent to rain attenuation e tincreases exponentially with rain intensity
57. be converted into a DPV Destination Port Vector that the rest of the switch can use This is accomplished by accessing the Trunk Mapping table using the TrunklD that was in the ATU s entry Balancing Hash DA and SA for TrunkMask selection Trunk load balancing is accomplished using mode the frame s DA and SA fields to access one of eight Trunk Masks Two options are available XOR The lower 3 bits if the frame s DA and SA are XOR ed together to select the TrunkMask to use 140 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration hash The hash computed for address table lookups is used for the Trunk Mask selection Use this parameter to reach better load balancing between the ports in the trunk Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Enabled When this parameter is enabled the port is considered to be a member of a trunk with the Trunk Id defined below Trunk Id This parameter defines which trunk the port is to be associated with All ports that are members of the same trunk must be assigned the same Trunk ID Balancing Tr
58. behaviour is affected by the Frame mode menu Interface Port ad vanced Frame mode parameter Frame mode normal unmodify Frames are transmitted unmodified untag Remove the tag from any tagged frame tag Add a tag e g according to Default VID to any untagged frame Ethernet frame type is set to 0x8100 ether type not used tag Frame mode provider unmodify Use this mode when Frame mode is set to provider untag not used tag not used ether type not used tag Frame mode ether type DSA unmodify not used untag not used tag not used ether type Add a tag e g according to Default VID to any untagged frame tag Ethernet frame type is set according to Ether type parameter menu Switch settings Interface Port advanced RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 119 Configuration 802 1q mode This parameter determines if 802 1q base VLANs are used along with port based Discard tagged Discard untagged VTU priority override VLANs for this Ingress port It also determines the action to be taken if an 802 1q VLAN Violation is detected VLAN barriers both port based and 802 1q based can be bypassed by VLAN Tunnel disabled Use Port Based VLANs only The VID assigned to the frame is the port s Default VID which is used as the VID in the Provider Tag if the frame egresses a Provider port fallback Enable 802 1q for this Ingress port Do not discard Ingress Member ship violations and u
59. can be one of the following values disabled QoS functions are disabled 802 1p QoS according to 802 1p is enabled DSCP QoS according to DSCP is enabled 802 1p DSCP QoS according to 802 1p and DSCP is enabled The 802 1 prefer tag is selected DSCP 802 1p QoS according to 802 1p and DSCP is enabled The DSCP prefer tag is selected 84 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o RMON counters The unit internal Ethernet switch RMON counters Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings gt Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Local Unit A 07 49 Port status Port name In good octets In bad octets In unicasts In multicasts In broadcasts In pause In underSize In oversize In FCS errors In fragments In jabber In MAC RX errors In discards In filtered Out octets Out FCS errors Out unicasts Out multicasts Out broadcasts Out pause Out deffered Out collisions Out single Out multiple Out excessive Out late Out filtered Size 64 octets Size 65 127 octets Size 128 255 octets Size 256 511 octets Size 512 1023 octets Size 1024 max octets Histogram counters mode Measure time RMON counters p2 Eth1 getman total diff cooocooiociocoonodccioi ccococolicojcoco O O060O GS o9 1o 230 9 0 o 00000000000 000005000000000000000 000000 00 00 00 Fig 7 18 Menu Switch settings RMON counters Queue allocation
60. environment licensing sssssesss menm emn nnnm 239 A E 239 11 2 RoHS and WEEE compliance ooccccccccccncconcccnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennninininn 239 11 3 Liability for Defects and Safety Instructions sssseem 239 11 4 Important NotifiCations seriden rrt b e ER ERE ER Le deter ehe tede dene tive ertt 240 11 5 MWattaiby or Race Hum tooth cet tese secre Ceci pce Ac b ta ae Alaina de 241 11 6 Declaration of Conformity soi doesnt tenes a P ode tanec 242 11 7 Country of Origin Declara Osio eds 246 A Antenna dimenslons tese tent tie ce d bnc pre eed o a RR OG d d S eR e anre 247 Bs RAIN ZONE MAD 4 oeste tr tret nat catncttahcatasecedzaateasenetsnestlssdinaredetstaatseactahaedatiaciaatiaasmeetasaagatts 248 C IP address in the PC Windows XP tte aca 249 DIP address inthe PC Windows Y Pisos id de dedo tus 251 E IP address in the PC VVIBdowWsoB euseseruitt olea vict cadencia t iintebentecsinndens 253 Fe SSH key A A aa a aa a a eebe e aeiia 256 Gz Hitps certificate ui eee e n E 258 Fl Unit IGG MAGIA e Ett 259 leq mE EE 260 Miei conati TS 263 List of Tables 2 1 Rain rate R mm h ITU R P 837 a e a a ee nennen nenne nnne rennes 14 2 2 Constants k a for horizontal and vertical polarization at 10 11 17 and 24 GHZ 15 2 3 60 96 of the 1st Fresnel zone sssssssssssee e enne nnne rennen eren rennen 18 3 1 Meaning of LED stat s indica
61. for the Local and remote Peer units If a connec tion has been established both sets of parameters have been set While working with an isolated unit only Local parameters are functional for the currently connected unit Note If the link is OK and there are no parameters shown of the station Peer it is necessary to click on Refresh Follows the description of basic settings After entering values on the screen always save the content by clicking on Apply Note If there is any problem with https certificate after completing the firmware upgrade please see the Annex Https certificate for further steps RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 37 Step by step Guide 5 1 1 Menu Link settings General Station name station can be assigned with a name e g the place of installation Station location for easier inclusion the network hierarchy it is possible to enter the station s loc ation RAy2 Microwave Link C Status Local Unit A 06 48 Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Link settings General gt General Radio Local Peer Unit code RAy2 17 RAy2 17 Service access Serial no 101234353 10233353 Alarms IPv4 address 192 168 141 226 24 192 168 _141 227 24 A a Station name Unit A Unit B Switch settings Station location Site A Site B Status Interface Date 2015 04 02 2015 04 02 Qos Time 06 45 16 06 45 15 Time source manual v anua Advanced Adjust time Adjust time Tools NTP source IP Maintenance NTP per
62. getman p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Radio Link status down copper down SFP up up Service access Speed duplex n a n a 100 Mbps full 1000 Mbps full SFP info No SFP module MDIX n a Switch settings Tx state n a n a transmitting transmitting gt Status Stp state img forwarding forwarding forwarding Flow control n a n a disabled enabled Interface QoS 802 1p DSCP 802 1p DSCP 802 1p DSCP 802 1p DSCP QoS Advanced Tools Refresh Fig 7 17 Menu Switch settings Port status Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Link status Ethernet link status can be down type no link signal detected up type link signal detected The type of the physical layer is indicated after the slash copper metallic Ethernet interface SFP SFP module can be either optic or metallic Speed Ethernet link Speed and duplex MAUpIEX Speed 10 100 1000 Mbps Duplex full half SFP info Information about the optionally inserted SFP module The three different types of SFP modules can be used Fibre dual mode with LC connector Fibre single mode
63. helps in situations where simple search for a maximum doesn t work as shown in the illustration incorrect adjustment Real radiation diagrams are more complex especially in that they run differently in horizont al and vertical axes The basic steps for determ ining the main radiation lobe however stay valid For example Fig 6 44 Radiation diagram incorrect adjustment Fig 6 45 3D example of more complicated Radiation Pattern 60 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Installation 6 5 3 Link test Basic parameters of the link are shown in the menu Status Brief its quality is characterized by RSS and SNR Values on Status screens can be refreshed manually by pressing the Refresh button or in real time with a period of several seconds after activating the Start button Press the Stop button to terminate the periodic refresh of values The RSS SNR and BER values can also be viewed on the screen Tools Live data Bar indicators After pressing the Start button values will be refreshed with a period of one second After installation it is good to reset the statistics using the Clear stats button in menu Status Detailed This allows easier diagnostics of the link s reliability over time 6 5 4 Parameters setup After both antennas have been aligned setup operation parameters for the link In the case of links operating in the free band setup the parameters based on survey results
64. https security certificate issued by RACOM If the units are linked to each other the status indicator in management interface states OK and status LED AIR lights green If not utilize the antenna alignment see pict 11 Configuration and backup of basic parameters Set bandwidth TX RX channel TX modulation RF power IP addresses do not use the default ones Access channels ssh https Reboot both units and check the link status to verify that the parameters are saved correctly Backup the configuration in the Tools Maintenance Backup Settings menu Store the backup file to your PC 1 Delivered items 2 Accessories RC EA Antennas US D i 2 Bushings Plugs 2x q Power supply Required tools Voltmeter 1xRJ45 Connectors 1xDC al Grease 1x 3 Bracket and antenna mounting Mounting right sided pictured below left sided 8 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Quick guide 5 Unit polarization 6 Unit installation Horizontal Vertical RAy2 10 RAy2 11 the same polarization for both units RAy2 17 RAy2 24 cross polarization one side horizontal the other side vertical Check the correct O ring placement on the antenna Ensure the antenna and unit are carefully aligned Do not use excessive force 7 Power DC 8 Power PoE GND te DC cable
65. info link echo cli_cnf_ show grep TX PWR echo Warning Permanently added 192 168 141 202 DSA to the list of known hosts cli_info link Link status up 0 RADIO TX PWR 4 0 user laptop The script contains source etc profile environment settings cli info link query for link status echo N reading return value cli cnf show grep TX PWR query for radio power echo reading return value cli info link Link status up return value 0 OK command RADIO TX PWR 4 power 4 dBm 0 OK command RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 167 Command Line Interface 8 3 Configuration with CLI 8 3 1 Configuration file e Configuration backup cli cnf backup get Saves the configuration of both units to file cnf backup tgz into the working directory Configuration restore cli cnf set t b b cnf backup tgz Restores configuration of both units from file cnf backup tgz e Default configuration list cli cnf def show Warning the command cli cnf factory set is not a default setting it uses factory settings deleting all logs and saved data It is very likely that the connection to peer unit will be interrupted 8 3 2 Firmware upgrade Current version of fw cli info station Preparation of files fw package for example bm4 RACOM 0 1 12 0 cpio copy using ssh or putty into folder tmp in RAy17 Command cli fw clear buffer Clears the RAy2 buffer cli fw buffe
66. keys used in both units Feature keys of the Peer unit only are displayed They can be neither added nor deleted To be able to manipulate the Feature keys it is necessary to access directly the management system of the relevant unit use the IP address of the relevant unit Limit The numeric value set by the key Remove The specific Feature key can be deleted using the Delete button The parameters controlled by this Feature key are reset to their default values after the unit restart NOTE The link radio parameters can be changed subsequently e g to a different operating frequency Upload Feature keys are installed into the unit from the binary files NOTE Use the file as it is do not unpack Open file upload Dialog for the Feature key binary file selection is open RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 145 Configuration The Feature key is activated after the unit restart Firmware Status Local RAy2 17L 07 12 Link settings Backup Feature keys Firmware Radio adaptation Restart General i Info Local Peer Service access Firmware version 2 1 13 1 Beta 2 1 13 1 Beta Radio firmware version 0 2 10 0 0 2 10 0 Alarms Switch settings Firmware upgrade Status Warning Upgrading to a wrong firmware may result with station malfunction docte Firmware upload Open file upload File name n a QoS File size B n a Advanced Local Peer Tools Version in buffer n a n a Maintenance Clean buffer lean buffer Liv
67. limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 24 19 9 92 8 5 14 23 12 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 48 38 8 85 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 60 49 1 81 18 5 26 33 23 29 17 5 19 9 64 QAM 72 62 3 78 21 5 28 34 26 30 14 3 17 1 7 128 QAM 84 73 6 75 25 0 30 37 28 33 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 96 81 2 73 28 0 33 40 31 36 10 0 12 4 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 20 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3dB 1 dB 3dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 31 228 91 8 5 14 23 12 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 62 50 2 84 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 19 8 21 12 32 QAM 77 5 63 5 80 18 5 26 30 23 26 5 17 8 19 12 64 QAM 93 80 5 77 21 5 28 30 26 26 5 14 8 17 1 12 128QAM 108 5 96 4 73 25 0 30 37 28 33 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 124 110 4 71 28 0 33 40 31 36 10 0 12 4 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 28 30 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 50 36 8 90 7 5 12 23 10 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 100
68. m S USB service connector RSS voltage output connectors Important AN It is strongly recommended to use a high quality SFP module The SFP modules listed in Accessories are thoroughly tested by RACOM and are guaranteed to function with RAy2 units It is possible to use any other SFP module but RACOM cannot guarantee they will be completely compatible with RAy2 units 22 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Product The SFP status LED function The LED status is controlled directly from the SFP module Its function is specific for each SFP module The typical behaviour is an indication of the received signal strength Should the signal be in the proper power range not too strong and not too weak the LED is shining ETH1 POE ETH2 Fig 3 3 Connectors covered Fig 3 4 Connectors uncovered Important A It is recommended that the ETH cable should be grounded at both ends of the connection For example the connector CON RJ45 UBNT CAT6 and ETH socket on the control panel should have a grounded sheath as should the connection to the RAy2 unit All bushings and plugs including the original plugs in the ports must be fitted with O rings and carefully tightened Otherwise the unit is not protected against moisture intake and can not offer guaranteed functionality For detailed description see Connectors and Start up 3 3 Power supply The microwave unit can be powered either by PoE or a DC power source Standard
69. mountable Surge protection e OTH DL 1GRJ45 orig part no DL 1GRJ45 Protection from the voltage spikes Datasheet OTH DL CAT 6 60V Orig part no DL Cat 6 60 V Datasheet CAT5e cable CAB CATSE FTP TLD orig part no PLUO30078 Cat 5e cable for connecting FOD units to the network TELDOR Datasheet CAT7 cable CAB S FTP 4x orig part no S FTP 4x 2x23AWG Cat 7 2x 2x24 AWG Cat 7 cable for connecting FOD units to the network PEWTRONIC Ltd Datasheet http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi OTH DL 1GRJ45 pdf s http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi OTH DL CAT 6 60V pdf site www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi CAB CAT5E FTP TLD pdf 10 http Awww racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi CAB SFTP 4x pdf 32 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Accessories CAT6 connector e CON RJ45 UBNT CAT6 i STP RJA5 Cat6 8p8c wire gold plated AWG24 UBNT E Orig part no TC CON connector STP RJ45 SET RAY2 TLG EXT35 Orig part no Telegartner MFP8 Cat 6A AWG 22 27 Connector RJ45 Cat6A AWG 24 22 Telegartner Racom SET RAY2 EXT35 e Set RJ45 connector Telegartner and cable bushing lengthening 35mm Suitable for AWG24 22 Cat5e Cat6A Cat7 cables Datasheet SFP module RJ45 e SFP RJ45 AVAGO orig part no ABCU 5730ARZ SFP module RJ45 interface
70. o Configuration 7 4 Link settings 7 4 1 General Setup of general parameters of the link RAy2 Microwave Link C Status Local Unit A 06 48 Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Link settings General gt General Radio Local Peer Unit code RAy2 17 RAy2 17 Service access Serial no 101234353 10233353 Alarms IPv4 address 192 168 141 226 24 192 168 141 227 24 R Station name Unit A Unit B Switch settings Station location Site A Site B Status Interface Date 2015 04 02 2015 04 02 QoS Time 06 45 16 06 45 15 Time source manual v Advanced Adjust time Adjust time Tools NTP source IP Maintenance NTP period Time zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time History Logs Daylight saving off v Programs Help Apply Cancel i Show defaults Fig 7 7 Menu Link settings General Unit code Unit type indicator Serial no Unit serial number IPv4 address IP address in the standard dotted decimal notation including the bit width of netmask after the forward slash Station name Station name assigned by user Station location Station location assigned by user Date Time The internal real time clock The clock is set manually or it is synchronized with NTP server and set for both units Time source Time synchronization source setup Manual setup or NTP protocol use For easier diagnostics of link operation it is recommended to use the NTP time synchronization RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 69 Con
71. one of the egress queues inside the switch QPri override will not affect the contents of the frame in any way frame queue Both of the above overrides take place on the frame The DA ATU Priority Override has the highest priority over the port s Default Priority the frame s IEEE and or IP priorities the VTU Priority Override and the SA Priority Override RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 131 Configuration Port o Port Association Vector for ATU learning The value in these bits one bit per port is association used as the port s DPV on automatic ATU Learning or Entry State refresh whenever PAV these bits contain a non zero value When these bits are all zero automatic Learning and Entry_State refresh is disabled on this port For normal switch operation this port s bit should be the only bit set in the vector These bits must only be changed when frames are not entering the port The PAV bits can be used to set up port trunking along with the VLANTable bits For the two ports that form a trunk set both of their port s bits in both port s PAV registers this Port association parameter for both ports of the trunk then use the VLANTable to isolate the two ports from each other or to use the Trunk Mask table to steer the traffic from the other ports down the desired trunk line of the pair using DA SA Load Balancing 132 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration ATU Status Link settings G
72. one ssh key defined Note More users concurrently If two or more users work concurrently on the unit any change of configuration settings should be applied by all users This applies to the menu Link settings which works with both Local and Peer parameters Notification to other users If one user sends the Apply command other users will receive a message Configuration changed please go to Link settings and click Refresh Other users can only use the Apply command after refreshing Link Settings RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link TT Configuration Edit use Clicking Edit next to a username opens a screen with configuration of the given account Status Local RAy2 17L 09 23 Link settings x Services USB accessories Users General Radio Edit user Username admin gt Service access Group cli_super Alarms a P d Delete Switch settings Set Status New password Interface Confirm password QoS Delete SSH key O Set replace Tools Add Maintenance Key file Prochazet Soubor nevybran Live data History Logs Apply Cancel Fig 7 12 Menu Link settings Username Group Password New password Confirm password SSH key Key file Service access Users edit User name The group to which this user will belong Password can be set or deleted Delete User will not have a password The user will only be able to log in with an ssh key In order to delete the password you
73. or untagged information Frames that ingress a port that trigger a policy mirror are mapped copied to this port as long as the frame is not filtered or discarded CPU destination port can not be changed It is shown here to better understand the description of some other parameters which interact with the CPU destination port For example the trap value of the Policy parameters cause frames to be forwarded to this CPU destination port There are four different operations as a result of a policy normal Normal frame switching mirror Mirror copy frame to the Mirror destination port trap Trap re direct frame to the CPU destination port discard Discard filter the frame There are eight different policy triggers DA DA Policy Mapping occurs when the DA of a frame is contained in the ATU address database with an Entry State set to static policy SA SA Policy Mapping occurs when the SA of a frame is contained in the ATU address database with an Entry State set to static policy VTU VTU Policy Mapping occurs when the VID of a frame is contained in the VTU database with the VID policy parameter enabled ether type EtherType Policy Mapping occurs when the Ether Type of a frame matches the Ether type parameter of this port PPPoE PPPoE Policy Mapping occurs when the Ether Type of a frame matches 0x8863 VBAS VBAS Policy Mapping occurs when the Ether Type of a frame matches 0x8200 DHCP DHCP option 82 Policy Mapping occurs when t
74. port is Locked and the port s DropOnLock SAFiltering mode is set Normal auto learning will resume on the port as soon as the number of active unicast MAC ad dresses associated to this port is less than the LearnLimit due to address aging Care is needed when enabling this feature Enable Learn to all GL1 0x0A 11 3 Learn2All 1 130 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Set SA filtering to disabled or drop on unlock PORT 0x04 14 SAFiltering 0 0 Safe procedure Disable or block the ports PORT 04 1 PortState 1 0 Flush all non static adresses in the ATU Define the desired limit for the ports Re enable the ports SA priority When any other than none mode is selected SA ATU priority overrides can occur override on this port An SA ATU priority override occurs when the source address of a frame results in an ATU hit where the SA s MAC address returns an EntryState that indicates Priority Override When this happens three forms of priority overrides are possible other than none none Normal frame priority processing is active frame PRI value assigned to the frame s SA the MAC priority field in the ATU database is used to overwrite the frame s previously determined frame priority FPri If the frame egresses the tagged priority in the frame will be this new PRI value queue The two upper bits of the PRI value assigned to the frame s SA the MAC priority field in the ATU database are
75. recommendations 1 Only qualified personnel with authorisation to work at heights are entitled to install antennas on masts roofs and walls of buildings Do not install the antenna in the vicinity of electrical wiring The antenna and bracket should not come into contact with electrical wiring at any time The antenna and cables are electrical conductors During installation electrostatic charges may build up which may lead to injury During installation or repair work to parts of the antenna lead bare metal parts must be temporarily grounded The antenna and antenna cable must be grounded at all times See Section 6 4 Grounding Do not mount the antenna in windy or rainy conditions or during a storm or if the area is covered with snow or ice Do not touch the antenna antenna brackets or conductors during a storm http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07 prislusenstvi ZSA16 en pdf http www racom eu eng products microwave link html accessories 54 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Installation Fig 6 30 Grounding kit for S FTP 4 2 cable Fig 6 31 Grounding kit detail Fig 6 32 Protective conductor at the FOD unit Fig 6 33 Grounding the FOD unit Fig 6 34 Protective conductor at the mast Fig 6 35 RAy grounding kit on a ZSA16 terminal RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 55 Installation NY hi An 7 o0 a _ li Fig 6 36 Separated lightning conductor
76. regardless of their VLAN membership will to CPU be considered MGMT frames and sent to the CPU port See the RSTP RSTP enable parameter Reserved This parameter sets the priority of the frames affected by Reserved multicast pri multicast to CPU parameter ority Reserved This parameter enables individual multicast DA addresses to be affected by Re multicast DA served multicast to CPU parameter Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Learning When this parameter is disabled normal frame processing occurs ForceMap When this parameter is enabled all received frames will be considered MGMT MG MT Management frames frames that can tunnel through Blocked ports and are mapped to the port or ports defined in the VLANTable bits overriding the mapping from the address database The forcing function is needed to get BPDU frames to egress specific ports by the CPU for the Spanning Tree Protocol ForceMapped frames will egress ports that are not in the Disabled port state i e they are MGMT frames and will egress via Blocked ports Th
77. restrictors working in parallel according to the schedule leaky bucket These are called Resource This is analogous to RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 99 Configuration the container which is intermittently replenished by tokens according to incoming frames and is continu ously emptied Regulatory measures are implemented at a certain height to ensure the bucket does not overflow PIRL Edit section of this menu is made up of several groups of parameters Resource identification Resource capacity transfer byte into tokens Method of counting frames Regulatory interventions drop frame reduce feeding Selecting frames all by priority QPri by type The above mentioned parameters are used to allocate part of a frame to each Resource Their passage is regulated thus avoiding network congestion If there is a framework that does not match the filter of any Resource this then passes to the switch without restrictions Switching block In this block L2 switch each frame is routed to a designated port according to the Advanced menu Egress queue Block output queues Each port receives frames from the L2 switch through 4 queues No 3 0 The highest priority has a queue No 3 The frames are organized into queues according to their priorities QPri The Method to empty queues is selected by the parameter Scheduling Mode The emptying rate is governed by the Rate limit parameter A
78. the device and the remote device negotiate the speed and duplex with which to operate If the remote device does not have Auto Negotiation capability the device uses the parallel detect function to determine the speed of the remote device for 100BASE TX and 10BASE T modes If a link is established based on the parallel RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 93 Configuration Speed duplex Flow control Force flow control 1000T master mode Energy detect detect function it is then required to establish the link at half duplex mode only Refer to IEEE 802 3 clauses 28 and 40 for a full description of Auto Negotiation 1000BASE X Auto Negotiation is defined in Clause 37 of the IEEE 802 3 specific ation It is used to auto negotiate duplex and flow control over fibre cable If the PHY enables 1000BASE X Auto Negotiation and the link partner does not the link cannot linkup The device implements an Auto Negotiation bypass mode SGMII Auto Negotiation SGMII is a de facto standard designed by Cisco SGMII uses 1000BASE X coding to send data as well as Auto Negotiation information between the PHY and the MAC However the contents of the SGMII Auto Negoti ation are different than the 1000BASE X Auto Negotiation WARNING If one device provides Auto negotiation and the other works with a manual link parameters settings i e without Auto negotiation the link operates in half duplex mode If the manual settings is set to
79. the selected restart RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 149 Configuration 7 6 2 Live data Bar indicators Status Local Unit A 09 45 Peer Unit B 09 Link settings Generi Bar indicators RX constellation diagram Frequency spectrum analyzer Radio RSS Service access Alarms z EA Switch settings Paer 74 2 72 9 p M M T Status 110 70 30 Interface RSS dBm Qos SNR Advanced Peer Maintenance gt Live data 0 10 20 30 40 SNR dB Histo e BER Logs Programs Local Help Peer A et 1e 08 1e 07 1e 06 1e 05 1e 04 1e 03 1e 02 BER Refresh gt Start Stop Fig 7 48 Menu Tools Bar indicators Graphical indication of BER SNR and RSS Refresh One time update of displayed values Start Stop Use the Start button to start automatic update of displayed values with a period of 1 second Use the Stop button to stop it 150 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration RX constellation diagram Status Local Unit A 09 51 Peer Unit B 0g Link settings dd Bar indicators RX constellation diagram Frequency spectrum analyzer RX modulation BER SNR dB RSS dBm Radio QPSK 0 00e 00 315 68 8 Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance gt Live data History Logs Programs Help Buffer 1024 v Refresh Fig 7 49 Me
80. then also to the external air termination network see Fig 6 29 Grounding installation 2 If there is not an external LPS on the building we recommend routing lightning current through an 8mm FeZn conductor to a common grounding system or to a separate grounding electrode with a ground resistance up to 10 Q For limiting the overvoltage transferred over the data cable and into the building we recommend fitting surge protection at the interface between zones LPZ 0 and LPZ 1 connected via a CYA 4 mm conductor to the same grounding point as the antenna or the antenna mast We recommend protecting the PoE power supply from overvoltage on the LV side with suitable class D surge protection The RAy2 unit is grounded to the flange at the fixing screws using an M8 screw An insulated copper cable with a minimum cross section of 6 mm terminated with a terminal lug is used as a protective conductor The conductor should have a green yellow plastic cover along its whole length For grounding a RAy grounding kit can be ordered as an accessory see Chapter 4 Accessories containing a grounding terminal ZSA16 40 cm grounding strip 15 mm wide and 100 cm of cable with grounding lugs For instructions on installing terminals see the datasheet RAy grounding kit A qualified person must install the antenna Racom supplies surge protection for installation on Ethernet cables entering buildings For more details see Surge protection Additional safety
81. used to overwrite the frame s previously determined queue priority QPri The QPri is used internally to map the frame to one of the egress queues inside the switch QPri override will not affect the contents of the frame in any way frame queue Both above overrides take effect on the frame The SA ATU Priority Override has a higher priority than the port s Default Priority the frame s IEEE and or IP priorities and the VTU Priority Override The priority determined by the frame s SA can however be overridden by the frame s DA Priority Override DA priority When any other than none mode is selected the DA ATU priority overrides can occur override on this port A DA ATU priority override occurs when the source address of a frame results in an ATU hit where the DA s MAC address returns an EntryState that indicates Priority Override When this occurs three forms of priority overrides are possible other than none none Normal frame priority processing is active frame PRI value assigned to the frame s DA the MAC priority field in the ATU database is used to overwrite the frame s previously determined frame priority FPri If the frame egresses the tagged priority in the frame will be the new PRI value queue The two upper bits of the PRI value assigned to the frame s DA the MAC priority field in the ATU database are used to overwrite the frame s previously determined queue priority QPri The QPri is used internally to map the frame to
82. 0 24093 5 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24170 5 24174 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24076 0 24079 5 24083 0 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24216 0 24219 5 24223 0 24230 0 24233 5 24237 0 ver 2 1 222 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 28 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 84 MHz duplex spacing range 70 217 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM250_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz 24037 5 24065 5 24093 5 24121 5 24149 5 Ch No Upper MHz 24093 5 24121 5 24149 5 24177 5 24205 5 24233 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24016 5 24020 0 24023 5 24027 0 24030 5 24034 0 24041 0 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 24069 0 24072 5 24076 0 24079 5 24083 0 24086 5 24090 0 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 Ch No Upper MHz 24086 5 2
83. 0 00 45 02 0 00 2015 04 0118 27 40 03 0 00 44 64 0 00 2015 04 0118 42 39 83 0 00 44 42 0 00 sachin 2015 04 01 18 57 40 13 0 00 44 39 0 00 gt History 2015 04 01 19 12 39 75 0 00 44 36 0 00 m 2015 04 0119 27 39 55 0 00 44 21 0 00 2015 04 01 19 42 3953 0 00 44 09 0 00 Programs 2015 04 01 19 57 39 49 0 00 44 04 0 00 Help 2015 04 01 20 12 39 35 0 00 44 00 0 00 2015 04 01 20 27 39 21 0 00 43 92 0 00 2015 04 01 20 42 39 12 0 00 43 78 0 00 2015 04 01 20 57 39 05 0 00 43 78 0 00 2015 04 01 21 12 39 05 0 00 43 73 0 00 2015 04 0121 27 38 99 0 00 43 50 0 00 2015 04 01 21 42 39 02 0 00 43 52 0 00 2015 04 01 21 57 38 92 0 00 43 45 0 00 2015 04 0122 12 38 92 0 00 43 32 0 00 Refresh Fig 7 53 Menu Tools History Data Quantities Detailed graphical view of values for selected interval Plotted Shows only the values that are selected for the graph Local Peer All Shows all logged values Filtering of values from local remote or both 156 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration 7 6 4 Logs Shows internal unit logs Individual tabs allow total or filtered view Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History gt Logs Programs Help Local Unit A 10 31 Link Ok Peer Unit B 1 Overall Local alarms Local events Peer alarms Peer events j Filter 2015 04 02T09 54 12 0000 CLEAR
84. 0263 375 10613 375 10541 625 10265 125 10615 125 10543 375 10266 875 10616 875 10545 125 10268 625 10618 625 10546 875 10270 375 10620 375 10548 625 10272 125 10622 125 10550 375 10273 875 10623 875 10552 125 10275 625 10625 625 10553 875 10277 375 10627 375 10555 625 10279 125 10629 125 10557 375 10280 875 10630 875 10559 125 10282 625 10632 625 10560 875 10284 375 10634 375 10562 625 10286 125 10636 125 10564 375 10287 875 10637 875 10566 125 10289 625 10639 625 10567 875 10291 375 10641 375 10569 625 10293 125 10643 125 10571 375 10294 875 10644 875 10573 125 10296 625 10646 625 ver 2 0 184 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10152 25 10155 75 10159 25 10162 75 10166 25 10169 75 10173 25 10176 75 10180 25 10183 75 10187 25 10190 75 10194 25 10197 75 10201 25 10204 75 10208 25 10211 75 10215 25 10218 75 10222 25 Oo 400 0 n2nU e 10 NN dl ODOOAOAANDOAKRWDND RAy2 10 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 15 10 65 GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 3 5 MHz CEPT ERC REC 12 05 E B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10502 25 10225 75 10575 75 10505 75 10229 25 10579 25 10509 25 10232 75 10582 75 10512 75 10236 25 10586 25 10516 25 10239 75 10589 75 10519 75 10243 25 10593 25 10523 25 10246 75 10596 75 10526 75 10250 25 10600 25 10530 25 10253 75
85. 065 5 24149 5 24069 0 24153 0 24072 5 24156 5 24076 0 24160 0 24079 5 24163 5 24083 0 24167 0 24086 5 24170 5 24090 0 24174 0 24093 5 24177 5 24097 0 24181 0 24100 5 24184 5 24104 0 24188 0 24107 5 24191 5 24111 0 24195 0 241145 24198 5 24118 0 24202 0 24121 5 24205 5 24125 0 24209 0 24128 5 24212 5 24132 0 24216 0 24135 5 24219 5 24139 0 24223 0 24142 5 24226 5 24146 0 24230 0 24149 5 24233 5 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 ver 2 1 230 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 40 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 70 MHz duplex spacing range 70 154 MHz Freq tab e rcinfo24_1SM200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L20 240725 U40 241425 L32 24114 5 U52 24184 5 L44 24156 5 U64 24226 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24076 0 24079 5 24083 0 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24170 5 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24212 5 24216 0 24219 5 24223 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 231 Technical parameters T
86. 1 125 10419 125 10587 125 0 400 c0 n2nUD ver 2 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 181 Technical parameters RAy2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 3 5 MHz Channel arrangements based on 7 MHz duplex range 59 5 283 5 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo10 A default Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 1 10302 75 2 10306 25 3 10309 75 10477 75 10365 75 10533 75 4 10313 25 10481 25 10369 25 10537 25 5 10316 75 10484 75 10372 75 10540 75 6 10320 25 10488 25 10376 25 10544 25 7 10323 75 10491 75 10379 75 10547 75 8 10327 25 10495 25 10383 25 10551 25 10330 75 10498 75 10386 75 10554 75 10334 25 10502 25 10390 25 10558 25 10337 75 10505 75 10393 75 10561 75 10341 25 10509 25 10397 25 10565 25 10344 75 10512 75 10400 75 10568 75 10348 25 10516 25 10404 25 10572 25 10351 75 10519 75 10407 75 10575 75 10355 25 10523 25 10411 25 10579 25 10358 75 10526 75 10414 75 10582 75 10362 25 10530 25 10418 25 10586 25 ver 2 0 RAy2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 7 MHz VO R 14 12 2012 17 duplex range 63 280 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo10_A_default 6 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10304 5 10308 0 10311 5 10479 5 10367 5 10535 5 10318 5 10486 5 10374 5 10542 5 10325 5 10493 5 10381 5 1054
87. 10 470 10 590 MHz sub band B 10 125 10 325 MHz 10 475 10 675 MHz Purpose of use Microwave IP Bridge to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the essential requirements and other relevant requirements of the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity Ns The product is in conformity with the following standards and or other normative documents Spectrum art 3 2 EN 302 217 1 V1 3 1 EN 302 217 2 2 V2 2 1 EMC art 3 1 b EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 4 V2 1 1 Safety art 3 1 a EN 60950 1 ed 2 2006 A1 2010 A2 2014 A11 2009 A12 2011 Cor 1 2012 Notified Body Opinion According to European Union Directive 1999 5 EC ANNEX IV Document No 0120 CC V0030 14 Issued by Cesky metrologicky institut Okruzni 31 Brno CR 13 of February 2015 Notified Body No 1383 CE 1383 The above named equipment is classified as a Class 2 radio equipment and it is marked with Equipment Class Identifier T in accordance with Commission Decision 2000 299 EC Nove Mesto na Morave 5 of March 2015 Jiri Hruska CEO A rA CH STD Y RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic WWW racom eu Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu ver 1 3 Fig 11 1 Declaration of Conformity fo
88. 10805 25 10808 75 10812 25 10815 75 10819 25 OMNOTRWN 11240 75 11244 25 11247 75 11251 25 11254 75 11258 25 11261 75 11265 25 11268 75 11272 25 11275 75 11279 25 11282 75 11286 25 11289 75 11293 25 11296 75 11300 25 11303 75 11307 25 11310 75 11314 25 11317 75 11321 25 11324 75 11328 25 11331 75 11335 25 11338 75 11342 25 11345 75 11349 25 10822 75 10826 25 10829 75 10833 25 10836 75 10840 25 10843 75 10847 25 10850 75 10854 25 10857 75 10861 25 10864 75 10868 25 10871 75 10875 25 10878 75 10882 25 10885 75 10889 25 10892 75 10896 25 10899 75 10903 25 10906 75 10910 25 10913 75 10917 25 10920 75 10924 25 10927 75 11352 75 11356 25 11359 75 11363 25 11366 75 11370 25 11373 75 11377 25 11380 75 11384 25 11387 75 11391 25 11394 75 11398 25 11401 75 11405 25 11408 75 11412 25 11415 75 11419 25 11422 75 11426 25 11429 75 11433 25 11436 75 11440 25 11443 75 11447 25 11450 75 11454 25 11457 75 10938 25 10941 75 10945 25 10948 75 10952 25 10955 75 10959 25 10962 75 10966 25 10969 75 10973 25 10976 75 10980 25 10983 75 10987 25 10990 75 10994 25 10997 75 11001 25 11004 75 11008 25 11011 75 11015 25 11018 75 11022 25 11025 75 11029 25 11032 75 11036 25 11039 75 11043 25 11046 75 11050 25 11053 75 11468 25 11471 75 11475 25 11478 75 11482 25 11485 75 11489 25 11492 75 11496 25 11499 75 11503 25 11506 75 11510 25 11513 75 11
89. 11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz OMANDOARWHD Bandwidth 28 MHz CEPT Rec 12 06 Annex B 2 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 195 Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz ONOOaABRWDNDN Bandwidth 30 MHz IC A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 1 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz Bandwidth 40 MHz CEPT CEPT 12 06 Annex B 1 ITU R F 387 rec 1 2 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 3 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz Bandwidth 40 MHz ACMA ACMA A sub band Freq table r
90. 120 Set mouting RAy17 Antenna Andrew 30 60 100 Set mouting RAy17 Antenna Arkivator 30 60 99 Set mouting RAy24 Antenna Andrew 30 60 100 Set mouting RAy24 Antenna Arkivator 30 60 99 120 Flexible waveguide mounting kit SET RAY FX R100 SET RAY FX R120 Cable bushing SET RAY2 CON B SET RAY2 EXT35 SET RAY2 EXT F50 Power supply DC PWS AC DC AD 55B Power supply PoE PWR POE36U 1AT PWR POE36D 1AT Set mouting RAy2 to flange R100 Set mouting RAy2 to flange R120 Basic set cable bushings and connectors Cable bushing lengthening PG21 35 mm Cable bushing lengthening PG21 Flexi 50cm Power supply 90 260 VAC 50 W at 27 6 VDC MeanWell Power supply PoE 1xGb Eth 90 264 VAC 33 6 W at 56 VDC Phihong Power supply PoE 1xGb Eth 36 72 VDC 33 6 W at 56 VDC Phihong Power supply PoE 4x Eth PWR POE125U 4AT N Power supply holder Power supply PoE 4xEth 90 264 VAC 33 6 W Port 0 40 C Phihong 28 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Accessories HOL POE PHI 1A HOL POE PHI 4A Surge protection OTH DL 1GRJ45 OTH DL CAT 6 60V CAT5e CAT7 cable CAB CAT5E FTP TLD CAB S FTP 4x CAT6 connector CON RJ45 UBNT CAT6 SET RAY2 TLG EXT35 SFP module RJ45 SFP RJ45 AVAGO SFP module optical SFP DLC APAC DIN rail holder for PoE Phihong 19 Rack holder for 1xPOE125U 4 AT N Phihong Surge protection 1Gb Eth Cat 6 LPZOB LPZ1 IP20 40 85 C Surge protection 1Gb Eth Cat 6 LPZ2 LPZ3 IP20 40 85 C Double shell outdoor
91. 125 0 24198 5 24128 5 24202 0 24132 0 24205 5 24135 5 24209 0 24139 0 24212 5 24142 5 24216 0 24146 0 24219 5 24149 5 24223 0 24153 0 24226 5 24156 5 24230 0 24160 0 24233 5 24163 5 24237 0 24167 0 24240 5 24170 5 24244 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz no more channels ver 2 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 227 Technical parameters RAy2 24 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 73 5 MHz Bandwidth 7 MHz duplex spacing range 63 189 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24055 0 24128 5 24058 5 24132 0 24062 0 24135 5 24065 5 24139 0 24069 0 24142 5 24072 5 24146 0 24076 0 24149 5 24079 5 24153 0 24083 0 24156 5 24086 5 24160 0 24090 0 24163 5 24093 5 24167 0 24097 0 24170 5 24100 5 24174 0 24104 0 24177 5 24107 5 24181 0 24111 0 24184 5 24114 5 24188 0 24118 0 24191 5 24121 5 24195 0 24125 0 24198 5 24128 5 24202 0 24132 0 24205 5 24135 5 24209 0 24139 0 24212 5 24142 5 24216 0 24146 0 24219 5 24149 5 24223 0 24153 0 24226 5 24156 5 24230 0 24160 0 24233 5 24163 5 24237 0 24167 0 24240 5 24170 5 24244 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 ver 2 1 228 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters
92. 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 202 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters TX channel nominal frequencies RAS Renee peste Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 56 CS 80 MHz CEPT 12 06 Annex C A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 203 Technical parameters 10 5 RAy2 11 C D parameters Note The RAy2 11 C D units are not available yet 204 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 6 RAy2 17 parameters 10 6 1 Upper Lower Limits RAy2 17 TX power Modulation rll ids dBm dBm QPSK 25 5 16 QAM 25 5 32 QAM 25 5 64 QAM 25 5 128 QAM 25 5 256 QAM 25 5 ver 2 0 Minimum hw limit and default duplex spacing RAy2 17 Optional duplex spacing Channel width min default MHz MHz MHz 3 5 60 73 5 7 60 73 5 14 65 87 5 28 70 84 40 70 70 50 84 87 5 56 84 84 ver 2 6 RAy2 17 Band Range Unit L Unit U MHz MHz min 17 100 17 100 max 17 300 17 300 ver 1 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 205 Technical parameters 10 6 2 Radio parameters
93. 17210 0 17213 5 ver 2 1 212 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 17 Bandwidth 40 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex sp 70 MHz duplex spacing range 70 154 MHz Freq table rcinfo17 default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L6 171225 U26 17192 5 L18 171645 U38 17234 5 L30 172065 U50 17276 5 Ch No Lower MHz 17126 0 17129 5 17133 0 17136 5 17140 0 17143 5 17147 0 17150 5 17154 0 17157 5 17161 0 17168 0 17171 5 17175 0 17178 5 17182 0 17185 5 17189 0 17192 5 17196 0 17199 5 17203 0 Ch No Upper MHz 17196 0 17199 5 17203 0 17206 5 17210 0 17213 5 17217 0 17220 5 17224 0 17227 5 17231 0 17238 0 17241 5 17245 0 17248 5 17252 0 17255 5 17259 0 17262 5 17266 0 17269 5 17273 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 213 Technical parameters RAy2 17 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz duplex spacing 87 5 MHz Bandwidth 50 MHz duplex spacing range 84 143 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo17_default 17 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 17213 5 17129 5 17217 0 L9 17133 0 U34 17220 5 17136 5 17224 0 17140 0 17227 5 17143 5 17231 0 17147 0 17234 5 1
94. 2 32 2 129 1 59 7 dB Fade margin A Ps Pa 79 59 7 19 3 dB The resulting fade margin is larger than the required 11 dB Current legislation in the Czech Republic allows maximum EIRP of 20 i e the sum of transmit power and antenna gain at the transmitter can be 20 dB at the most For 99cm antennas TX power can be up to 20 42 22 dB the resultant equation is as follows PR Py Gr Gg FSL 22 42 42 129 1 67 1 dB RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 19 Implementation Notes Fade margin A Ps IPR 79 67 1 11 9 dB Fade margin is now only 12 dB which corresponds to link availability gt 99 99 of the time in a year Technical literature often gives the minimum fade margin of 20 dB For very long links more than 10 km fade margin will indeed be approximately 20 dB For shorter links however such large margin is not necessary It is helpful to first conduct the calculation above to receive an idea of the attenuation affecting the link The result To achieve the required transmission capacity and link availability for link distance of 4 km transmit power 22 dBm and 99 cm antennas were selected for both sides of the link Sources for Chapter Chapter 2 mplementation Notes 1 Lehpamer H Microwave transmission network Second edition ISBN 0071701222 McGraw Hill Professional 2010 ITU R recommendation used ITU R P 453 10 The radio refractive index its
95. 209 0 24212 5 24216 0 24219 5 24223 0 ver 2 1 224 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 50 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 87 5 MHz duplex spacing range 84 196 MHz Freq tab e rcinfo24_ISM250_default 15 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L8 240305 U33 24118 0 L23 24083 0 U48 24170 5 L38 241355 U63 24223 0 Ch No Lower MHz 24027 0 24034 0 24037 5 24041 0 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24069 0 24072 5 24076 0 24079 5 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24139 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24111 0 24114 5 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24184 5 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24212 5 24216 0 24219 5 ver 1 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 225 Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 56 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 84 MHz duplex spacing range 84 189 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM250_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels
96. 22 14 0 3 08 2 28 45 24 45 7 4 133 42 7 1 15 34 49 0 03 5 6 9 131 12 45 20 18 28 23 33 40 65 105 96 0 01 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 95 145 115 0 000 14 21 26 29 41 54 45 55 45 70 105 95 140 200 142 0 00 22 32 42 42 70 78 65 83 55 100 150 120 180 250 170 Compute specific attenuation yp dB km for the frequency polarization specific rain rate using ITU R recommendation P 838 Rain attenuation for rain rate yr can be calculated as follows Qv YRoot Kn Ro o1 where 14 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Implementation Notes Kn v On y constants for horizontal and vertical polarization Constants are slightly different for each polarization see next table according to ITU R P 838 Tab 2 2 Constants k a for horizontal and vertical polarization at 10 11 17 and 24 GHz Specific attenuation for 11 GHz kh Ah Ky Ay 10 GHz 0 01 1 26 0 01 1 22 11 GHz 0 02 1 21 0 02 1 16 17 GHz 0 06 1 09 0 07 1 01 24 GHz 0 14 1 01 0 14 0 96 Specific attenuation for 10 GHz 7 8 6 7 E EC 8 8 5 E 4 c uH 3 2 3 mv ks o o AB CD EF GH I Fig 2 2 Attenuation for 10 GHz polarization H V e o Specific attenuation dB km N 0 i ABCDEFGH I Fig 2 4 Attenuation for 17 GHz Rain zone K L MN P Q Specific attenuation for 17 GHz polariz
97. 24121 5 24195 0 24125 0 24198 5 24128 5 24202 0 24132 0 24205 5 24135 5 24209 0 24139 0 24212 5 24142 5 24216 0 24146 0 24219 5 24149 5 24223 0 24153 0 24226 5 24156 5 24230 0 24160 0 24233 5 24163 5 24237 0 24167 0 24240 5 24170 5 24244 0 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz no more channels ver 2 2 220 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 7 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 238 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM250_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz 24009 5 24016 5 24023 5 24030 5 24037 5 24044 5 24051 5 24058 5 24065 5 24072 5 24079 5 24086 5 24093 5 24100 5 24107 5 24114 5 24121 5 24128 5 24135 5 24142 5 24149 5 24156 5 24163 5 24170 5 24177 5 Ch No U19 U21 U23 U25 U27 U29 U31 U33 U35 U37 U39 U41 U43 U45 U47 U49 U51 U53 U55 U57 U59 U61 U63 U65 U67 U69 Upper MHz 24069 0 24076 0 24083 0 24090 0 24097 0 24104 0 24111 0 24118 0 24125 0 24132 0 24139 0 24146 0 24153 0 24160 0 24167 0 24174 0 24181 0 24188 0 24195 0 24202 0 24209 0 24216 0 24223 0 24230 0 24237 0 242
98. 25 11418 625 11024 875 11514 875 11156 125 11646 125 10799 125 11289 125 10930 375 11420 375 11026 625 11516 625 11157 875 11647 875 10800 875 11290 875 10932 125 11422 125 11028 375 11518 375 11159 625 11649 625 10802 625 11292 625 10933 875 11423 875 11030 125 11520 125 11161 375 11651 375 10804 375 11294 375 10935 625 11425 625 11031 875 11521 875 11163 125 11653 125 10806 125 11296 125 10937 375 11427 375 11033 625 11523 625 11164 875 11654 875 10807 875 11297 875 10939 125 11429 125 11035 375 11525 375 11166 625 11656 625 10809 625 11299 625 10940 875 11430 875 11037 125 11527 125 11168 375 11658 375 10811 375 11301 375 10942 625 11432 625 11038 875 11528 875 11170 125 11660 125 10813 125 11303 125 10944 375 11434 375 11040 625 11530 625 11171 875 11661 875 10814 875 11304 875 10946 125 11436 125 11042 375 11532 375 11173 625 11663 625 10816 625 11306 625 10947 875 11437 875 11044 125 11534 125 11175 375 11665 375 10818 375 11308 375 10949 625 11439 625 11045 875 11535 875 11177 125 11667 125 10820 125 11310 125 10951 375 11441 375 11047 625 11537 625 11178 875 11668 875 10821 875 11311 875 10953 125 11443 125 11049 375 11539 375 11180 625 11670 625 10823 625 11313 625 10954 875 11444 875 11051 125 11541 125 11182 375 11672 375 10825 375 11315 375 10956 625 11446 625 11052 875 11542 875 11184 125 11674 125 10827 125 11317 125 10958 375 11448 375 11054 625 11544 625 10828 87
99. 255 255 0 Default Gateway Checking the PC unit connection using Ping Check the connection between the PC and the unit via the Ethernet cable Right click on the Start button type the command cmd and press Enter Inside the cmd exe window that opens type ping 192 168 169 169 at the command prompt and press Enter Ping times and statistics are returned as shown Users king gt ping 192 168 169 169 Pinging 192 168 169 169 with 32 bytes of data i from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 hbytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 169 169 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum ms Average Gms If no communication takes place a message appears with the text Request timed out If communication between the web browser and the unit doesn t take place check the browser settings E g the Work offline item in the File menu must not be crossed out RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 255 SSH key generation Appendix F SSH key generation Linux Use ssh keygen command Windows Use PUTTYGEN EXE software which is typically located in the c Program Files Wputty directory and apply the Generate button To use CLI Command Line Interface access the unit with a
100. 28 375 11558 375 11142 125 11672 125 10802 625 11332 625 10912 875 11442 875 11030 125 11560 125 11143 875 11673 875 10804 375 11334 375 10914 625 11444 625 11031 875 11561 875 11145 625 11675 625 10806 125 11336 125 10916 375 11446 375 11033 625 11563 625 11147 375 11677 375 10807 875 11337 875 10918 125 11448 125 11035 375 11565 375 11149 125 11679 125 10809 625 11339 625 10919 875 11449 875 11037 125 11567 125 11150 875 11680 875 10811 375 11341 375 10921 625 11451 625 11038 875 11568 875 11152 625 11682 625 10813 125 11343 125 10923 375 11453 375 11040 625 11570 625 11154 375 11684 375 10814 875 11344 875 10925 125 11455 125 11042 375 11572 375 11156 125 11686 125 10816 625 11346 625 10926 875 11456 875 11044 125 11574 125 11157 875 11687 875 10818 375 11348 375 10928 625 11458 625 11045 875 11575 875 11159 625 11689 625 11047 625 11577 625 11161 375 11691 375 11049 375 11579 375 11163 125 11693 125 OOAONDOARWN ver 2 3 198 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz 10710 75 10714 25 10717 75 10721 25 10724 75 10728 25 10731 75 10735 25 10738 75 10742 25 10745 75 10749 25 10752 75 10756 25 10759 75 10763 25 10766 75 10770 25 10773 75 10777 25 10780 75 10784 25 10787 75 10791 25 10794 75 10798 25 10801 75
101. 28 5 28 5 28 5 128 QAM 25 0 25 0 250 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 27 0 315 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 30 5 31 0 256 QAM 28 5 28 0 28 0 28 0 28 0 28 0 28 0 28 0 29 0 ver 1 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 175 Technical parameters 10 2 Nominal frequency tables description RAy11 xA RAy11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex frequency 490 MHz 4 Bandwidth 56 MHz CS 80 2 CEPT 12 06 Annex C 9 Asub band9 Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 rcinfo11 A 490 n B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 rcinfo11 B 490 n Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10755 10795 10835 10875 10915 ver 1 0 11 1 The respective RAy unit name The letter x stands for L or U Lower or Upper band unit Example RAy11 xA means both RAy11 LA and RAy11 UA units See overview table for details NOTE The optional last figure in the unit name e g RAy11 LA 2 denotes number of Ethernet ports and it is not relevant for the Nominal frequency tables 2 The respective channel set nominal frequencies name in the Ray unit configuration interface see Configuration item Bandwith MHz In addition to the bandwith definition the name may contain additional text which defines the respective alternative of channel plan Examples Bandwith 40 MHz ITU means that the nominal frequencies in the table follow the rec
102. 3 TQ eu Port status RMON counters Queue allocation Register dump RSTP Groups Globals O all ports Ports Oponc_o PHyY Opinc1 PHY Opzethi PHyY Op3nc_3 PHY Opseth2 PHy Opscpu Opeair Refresh Fig 7 20 Menu Switch settings Register dump The exact contents of the internal switch configuration and diagnostic registers can be listed for dia gnostic purposes All registers are separated into several groups Groups Globals Global switch parameters All ports Global port related parameters Ports Port specific parameters Registers Registers contents is listed in hexadecimal notation 90 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration RSTP Status Local Unit A 14 19 Peer Unit B 1 Link settings m l Port status RMON counters Queue allocation Register dump RSTP enera Radi gt gt cli_rstp_status adio Bridge bro State enabled x BridgeId 8000 0002a9608b6b Bridge Proirity 32768 0x8000 Senice acces Designated Root 000 0002a9608b6b Alarms Root Port none Time Since Topology Change 619456 Switch settings Max Age 20 Bridge Max Age 20 Hello Time 2 Bridge Hello Time 2 gt Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Forward Delay 15 Hold Time Bridge Forward Delay 15 3 Stp Port air PortId 8003 in Bridge br0 Priority State PortPathCost Point2Point Edge Partner PathCost Designated Root Designated Cost Des
103. 30 17 26 5 18 3 21 1 7 32 QAM 225 184 2 76 5 18 5 24 133 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 270 233 6 73 5 21 5 27 35 25 32 14 5 16 8 128QAM 315 276 1 69 5 25 0 30 35 28 32 10 5 12 8 256 QAM 360 320 6 66 5 26 5 33 35 30 32 8 5 10 8 ver 1 0 RAy2 17 Channel spacing 56 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 72 9 87 7 5 12 23 10 19 24 0 26 4 16 QAM 198 160 2 80 15 0 19 30 17 26 5 18 3 21 1 7 32 QAM 247 5 202 7 76 18 5 24 133 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 297 256 9 73 21 5 27 35 25 32 14 5 16 8 128QAM 346 5 303 7 69 25 0 30 35 28 132 10 5 12 8 256 QAM 396 337 7 66 26 5 33 35 30 32 8 5 10 8 ver 2 0 RAy2 17 Channel spacing 56 MHz TO ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 85 8 85 10 0 13 23 11 19 24 0 26 4 16 QAM 198 169 9 78 16 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 247 5 206 2 74 19 0 25 33 23 29 14 5 15
104. 35 Configuration Monitoring Policy Status Local RAy2 17L 10 51 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17 Link settings PE VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP T Radio Monitoring Ingress monitor destination disabled y Service access D Egress monitor destination disabled Alarms A Port 2 Eth1 4 Eth2 5 CPU 6 Ai Switch settings ipaa E a ee Ingress monitor source O O E Status Egress monitor source O O O O Interface Qos Policy Mirror destination disabled vj gt Advanced CPU destination Tools Maintenance Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air 2 Policy DA normal v normal v normal b norma Live data Policy SA normal v normal y normal v norma History Policy VTU normal v normal v normal norma Logs one ether normal v normal v normal v norma Programs Hel Policy PPPoE normal Vj normal normal Y norma e P Policy VBAS normal v normal v normal Y norma a hini normal Mi normal v normal v norma Policy UDP normal v normal k normal v norma Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 40 Menu Switch settings Advanced Monitoring Policy Setup of Monitoring and Policy functions The Policy functions allow for special handling of specific types of ingress frames Ingress Frames that are targeted toward an ngress Monitor Destination leave via the port monitor selected by this parameter This includes frames received on a port that is enabled destination to be the Ingress monitor source Egress Frames t
105. 4 19 7 79 26 0 33 30 31 26 5 5 1 3 7 1 7 ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 7 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for J J ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 12 8 5 95 8 5 15 23 12 19 20 0 22 4 16 QAM 24 17 2 88 15 0 22130 20 26 5 18 3 19 7 32 QAM 30 22 1 85 18 5 24 30 22 26 5 16 3 18 7 64 QAM 36 29 7 81 21 5 29 34 26 30 14 3 16 7 128 QAM 42 34 7 79 25 0 32137 30 33 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 49 40 7 76 26 0 33 40 31 36 10 0 12 4 ver 2 4 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 189 Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 14 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Raw User RSS SNR for Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3dB 1 dB 3dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 24 19 9 93 8 5 14 23 12 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 48 38 8 86 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 60 49 1 82 18 5 26 33 23 29 17 1 5 1
106. 40 C to 85 C Avago Datasheet SFP module optical SFP DLC APAC Orig part no LS38 C3S TI N DD SFP module 2 fibres LC 10km 40 C to 85 C APAC Opto Datasheet Fibre cable outdoor patchcord outdoor pigtail CAB FIB 2F DLC DLC OFA 5m orig part no DLCRAC2Fyyy patchcord 2 fibres single mode LC connector LC connector yyy meters OFA CAB FIB 1F LC LC OFA 5m orig part no LCRAC1Fyyy patchcord 1 fibre single mode LC connector LC connector yyy meters OFA http www racom cz download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi SET RAY2 TLG EXT35 pdf va http www racom cz download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi SFP RJ45 AVAGO pdf 13 http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi SFP DLC APAC pdf RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 33 Accessories e CAB FIB 2F DLC x OFA 5m orig part no DLCORAC2Fyyy pigtail 2 fibres single mode LC connector loose end yyy meters OFA CAB FIB OFA 1F LC x OFA 5m orig part no LCORAC1Fyyy pigtail 1 fibre single mode LC connector loose end yyy meters OFA Datasheet CAB HYB 2F DLC DLC OFA 030m example for 30m long cable orig part no DLCHRAC2Fyyy Phoenix Microwave Hybrid Cable LSOH yyy meters OFA DC 2x1 5mm fibre patchcord 2 fibres single mode LC connector LC connector Datasheet ae DC cable e CAB DC 2x1 5 orig part no VO5SS F 2Dx1 50 silicone rubb
107. 4090 0 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24170 5 24174 0 24181 0 24184 5 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24209 0 24212 5 24216 0 24219 5 24223 0 24226 5 24230 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 223 Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 40 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 70 MHz duplex spacing range 70 203 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM250_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L8 24030 U28 24100 5 L20 240725 U40 24142 5 L32 241145 U52 24184 5 L44 24156 5 U64 24226 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24023 5 24027 0 24034 0 24037 5 24041 0 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24069 0 24076 0 24079 5 24083 0 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24142 5 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24093 5 24097 0 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 24135 5 24139 0 24146 0 24149 5 24153 0 24156 5 24160 0 24163 5 24167 0 24170 5 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24205 5 24
108. 44 0 Ch No Lower MHz 24006 0 24013 0 24020 0 24027 0 24034 0 24041 0 24048 0 24055 0 24062 0 24069 0 24076 0 24083 0 24090 0 24097 0 24104 0 24111 0 24118 0 24125 0 24132 0 24139 0 24146 0 24153 0 24160 0 24167 0 24174 0 24181 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24072 5 24079 5 24086 5 24093 5 24100 5 24107 5 24114 5 24121 5 24128 5 24135 5 24142 5 24149 5 24156 5 24163 5 24170 5 24177 5 24184 5 24191 5 24198 5 24205 5 24212 5 24219 5 24226 5 24233 5 24240 5 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 221 Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 14 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 87 5 MHz duplex spacing range 66 5 231 MHz Freq tab e rcinfo24 ISM250 default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz 24013 0 24027 0 24041 0 24055 0 24069 0 24083 0 24097 0 24111 0 24125 0 24139 0 24153 0 24167 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24086 5 24100 5 24114 5 24128 5 24142 5 24156 5 24170 5 24184 5 24198 5 24212 5 24226 5 24240 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24009 5 24016 5 24020 0 24023 5 24030 5 24034 0 24037 5 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24072 5 24076 0 24079 5 24086 5 24090
109. 5 RAy2 10 xA RAy2 10 xB Sub band Range Sub band Unit L Unit U MHz MHz min 10 300 10 470 2 max 10 420 10 590 min 10 125 10 475 s max 10 325 11 675 ver 1 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 177 Technical parameters 10 3 2 Radio parameters RAy2 10 Channel spacing 1 75 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit I Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 3 1 2 5 100 9 5 17 123 12 19 12 0 14 4 16 QAM 6 3 5 0 92 15 0 22 30 20 26 5 11 3 13 7 32 QAM 7 8 6 3 88 19 0 24 30 22 26 5 10 3 12 7 64 QAM 9 4 7 4 87 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 9 3 10 7 128 QAM 11 0 8 9 84 23 5 30 33 29 29 5 5 9 9 ver 2 4 RAy2 10 Channel spacing 3 5 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 6 49 96 9 5 15 23 12 19 14 0 16 4 16 QAM 12
110. 5 11318 875 10960 125 11450 125 11056 375 11546 375 10830 625 11320 625 10961 875 11451 875 11058 125 11548 125 10832 375 11322 375 10963 625 11453 625 11059 875 11549 875 10834 125 11324 125 10965 375 11455 375 11061 625 11551 625 10835 875 11325 875 10967 125 11457 125 11063 375 11553 375 10837 625 11327 625 10968 875 11458 875 11065 125 11555 125 10839 375 11329 375 11066 875 11556 875 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB OMNONARWNH ver 2 2 192 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz 10710 75 10714 25 10717 75 10721 25 10724 75 10728 25 10731 75 10735 25 10738 75 10742 25 10745 75 10749 25 10752 75 10756 25 10759 75 10763 25 10766 75 10770 25 10773 75 10777 25 10780 75 10784 25 10787 75 10791 25 10794 75 10798 25 10801 75 10805 25 10808 75 10812 25 10815 75 10819 25 10822 75 10826 25 10829 75 10833 25 10836 75 OONDABRWN 11200 75 11204 25 11207 75 11211 25 11214 75 11218 25 11221 75 11225 25 11228 75 11232 25 11235 75 11239 25 11242 75 11246 25 11249 75 11253 25 11256 75 11260 25 11263 75 11267 25 11270 75 11274 25 11277 75 11281 25 11284 75 11288 25 11291 75 11295 25 11298 75 11302 25 11305 75 11309 25 11312 75 11316 25 11319 75 11323 25 11326 75 10840 25 10843 75 10847 25 10850 75
111. 517 25 11520 75 11524 25 11527 75 11531 25 11534 75 11538 25 11541 75 11545 25 11548 75 11552 25 11555 75 11559 25 11562 75 11566 25 11569 75 11573 25 11576 75 11580 25 11583 75 Bandwidth 3 5 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 11053 75 11057 25 11060 75 11064 25 11067 75 11071 25 11074 75 11078 25 11081 75 11085 25 11088 75 11092 25 11095 75 11099 25 11102 75 11106 25 11109 75 11113 25 11116 75 11120 25 11123 75 11127 25 11130 75 11134 25 11137 75 11141 25 11144 75 11148 25 11151 75 11155 25 11158 75 11162 25 11583 75 11587 25 11590 75 11594 25 11597 75 11601 25 11604 75 11608 25 11611 75 11615 25 11618 75 11622 25 11625 75 11629 25 11632 75 11636 25 11639 75 11643 25 11646 75 11650 25 11653 75 11657 25 11660 75 11664 25 11667 75 11671 25 11674 75 11678 25 11681 75 11685 25 11688 75 11692 25 ver 2 3 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 199 Technical parameters Bandwidth RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB 7 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz ITU R F 387 Annex 5 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530 13 C
112. 6 Local 8 00 Mbps L1 auto 1000 Mbps full down Local 00 02 a9 9f 0c e1 10 10 0 188 24 off Web SSH Local 2015 10 12 07 43 54 7 days 21 08 01 7 days 21 06 57 0 days 00 01 04 99 9906 Configuration Link Ok Peer ASE RAy2 10 UA 10266514 RAy2 10U RACOM 2 1 13 0 2015 10 20 05 56 42 135 54 0 PoE Peer U horizontal rcinfo10_A_default 6 8 47 Egress limit ON 358 7 MHz U3 10 479500 L3 10 311500 QPSK 0 60 6 35 6 0 00e 00 Peer 8 00 Mbps L1 auto down down Peer 00 02 a9 9c a7 92 10 10 0 189 24 off Web SSH SNMP Peer 2015 10 12 20 16 34 7 days 08 06 48 7 days 08 06 48 0 days 00 00 00 100 0000 65 Configuration The Status menu provides basic information about local and remote station Informations is valid the moment the page is open or the Refresh button is hit The Status Brief tab shows only the most important values whereas the Status Detailed tab provides further details Below is a list of all values according to the tab Status Detailed The icon marks fields which are automatically updated with 30 sec period or 1 sec when the Start button is active 7 3 1 Status General LED indicators Unit status indication reen Radio link OK Pools ae Radio link interrupted S SYS Green System OK E ETH Green ETH1 port Link 10 100 1000 Orange ETH2 port Link 10 100 1000 Unit code Unit type indicator Serial no Unit seri
113. 625 11257 625 10898 875 11388 875 10995 125 11485 125 11126 375 11616 375 10769 375 11259 375 10900 625 11390 625 10996 875 11486 875 11128 125 11618 125 10771 125 11261 125 10902 375 11392 375 10998 625 11488 625 11129 875 11619 875 10772 875 11262 875 10904 125 11394 125 11000 375 11490 375 11131 625 11621 625 10774 625 11264 625 10905 875 11395 875 11002 125 11492 125 11133 375 11623 375 10776 375 11266 375 10907 625 11397 625 11003 875 11493 875 11135 125 11625 125 10778 125 11268 125 10909 375 11399 375 11005 625 11495 625 11136 875 11626 875 10779 875 11269 875 10911 125 11401 125 11007 375 11497 375 11138 625 11628 625 10781 625 11271 625 10912 875 11402 875 11009 125 11499 125 11140 375 11630 375 10783 375 11273 375 10914 625 11404 625 11010 875 11500 875 11142 125 11632 125 10785 125 11275 125 10916 375 11406 375 11012 625 11502 625 11143 875 11633 875 10786 875 11276 875 10918 125 11408 125 11014 375 11504 375 11145 625 11635 625 10788 625 11278 625 10919 875 11409 875 11016 125 11506 125 11147 375 11637 375 10790 375 11280 375 10921 625 11411 625 11017 875 11507 875 11149 125 11639 125 10792 125 11282 125 10923 375 11413 375 11019 625 11509 625 11150 875 11640 875 10793 875 11283 875 10925 125 11415 125 11021 375 11511 375 11152 625 11642 625 10795 625 11285 625 10926 875 11416 875 11023 125 11513 125 11154 375 11644 375 10797 375 11287 375 10928 6
114. 7150 5 17238 0 17154 0 17241 5 17157 5 17245 0 17161 0 17248 5 17164 5 17252 0 17168 0 17255 5 17171 5 17259 0 17175 0 17262 5 17178 5 17266 0 17182 0 17269 5 L24 17185 5 U49 17273 0 17189 0 ver 1 0 214 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 17 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex sp 84 MHz Bandwidth 56 MHz duplex spacing range 84 140 MHz Freq table rcinfo17 default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L8 17129 5 U32 17213 5 17133 0 17217 0 17136 5 17220 5 17140 0 17224 0 17143 5 17227 5 17147 0 17231 0 17150 5 17234 5 17154 0 17238 0 17157 5 17241 5 17161 0 17245 0 17164 5 17248 5 17168 0 17252 0 17171 5 17255 5 17175 0 17259 0 17178 5 17262 5 17182 0 17266 0 L24 171855 U48 17269 5 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 215 Technical parameters 10 7 RAy2 24 parameters 10 7 1 Upper Lower Limits RAy2 24 TX power Modulation bial 2 dBm dBm QPSK 30 10 16 QAM 30 10 32 QAM 30 10 64 QAM 30 10 128 QAM 30 10 256 QAM 30 10 ver 1 0 Minimum hw limit and default duplex spacing RAy2 24 Optional duplex spacing Channel width min default MHz MHz MHz 3 5 60 73
115. 7175 0 17178 5 17182 0 17185 5 17189 0 17192 5 17108 5 17196 0 17112 0 17199 5 17115 5 17203 0 17119 0 17206 5 17122 5 17210 0 17126 0 17213 5 17129 5 17217 0 17133 0 17220 5 17136 5 17224 0 17140 0 17227 5 17143 5 17231 0 17147 0 17234 5 17150 5 17238 0 17154 0 17241 5 17157 5 17245 0 17161 0 17248 5 17164 5 17252 0 17168 0 17255 5 17171 5 17259 0 17175 0 17262 5 17178 5 17266 0 17182 0 17269 5 17185 5 17273 0 17189 0 17276 5 17192 5 17280 0 17196 0 17283 5 17199 5 17287 0 17203 0 17290 5 17206 5 17210 0 17213 5 17217 0 17220 5 17224 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 211 Technical parameters RAy2 17 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex sp 84 MHz Bandwidth 28 MHz duplex spacing range 70 168 MHz Freq table rcinfo17 default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 17185 5 17189 0 17192 5 17196 0 17115 5 17199 5 17119 0 17203 0 17122 5 17206 5 17126 0 17210 0 17129 5 17213 5 17133 0 17217 0 17136 5 17220 5 17140 0 17224 0 17143 5 17227 5 17147 0 17231 0 17150 5 17234 5 17154 0 17238 0 17157 5 17241 5 17161 0 17245 0 17164 5 17248 5 17168 0 17252 0 17171 5 17255 5 17175 0 17259 0 17178 5 17262 5 17182 0 17266 0 17185 5 17269 5 17189 0 17273 0 17192 5 17276 5 17196 0 17280 0 17199 5 17283 5 17203 0 17206 5
116. 733 5 11223 5 10964 5 11454 5 10740 5 11230 5 10971 5 11461 5 10747 5 11237 5 10978 5 11468 5 10754 5 11244 5 10985 5 11475 5 10761 5 11251 5 10992 5 11482 5 10768 5 11258 5 10999 5 11489 5 10775 5 11265 5 11006 5 11496 5 10782 5 11272 5 11013 5 11503 5 10789 5 11279 5 11020 5 11510 5 10796 5 11286 5 11027 5 11517 5 10803 5 11293 5 11034 5 11524 5 10810 5 11300 5 11041 5 11531 5 10817 5 11307 5 11048 5 11538 5 10824 5 11314 5 11055 5 11545 5 10831 5 11321 5 11062 5 11552 5 10838 5 11328 5 11069 5 11559 5 10845 5 11335 5 11076 5 11566 5 10852 5 11342 5 11083 5 11573 5 10859 5 11349 5 11090 5 11580 5 10866 5 11356 5 11097 5 11587 5 10873 5 11363 5 11104 5 11594 5 10880 5 11370 5 11111 5 11601 5 10887 5 11377 5 11118 5 11608 5 10894 5 11384 5 11125 5 11615 5 10901 5 11391 5 11132 5 11622 5 10908 5 11398 5 11139 5 11629 5 10915 5 11405 5 11146 5 11636 5 10922 5 11412 5 11153 5 11643 5 10929 5 11419 5 11160 5 11650 5 10936 5 11426 5 11167 5 11657 5 10943 5 11433 5 11174 5 11664 5 10950 5 11440 5 11181 5 11671 5 10957 5 11447 5 10964 5 11454 5 ONOOARWDNDY ver 2 3 194 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bandwidth 14 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo
117. 8 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 4 2 Radio parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 1 75 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit M Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 3 1 2 5 99 9 5 15 23 12 19 12 0 14 4 16 QAM 6 3 5 0 93 15 0 22130 20 26 5 11 3 13 7 32 QAM 7 8 6 3 89 19 0 24 30 22 26 5 10 3 12 7 64 QAM 9 4 7 4 88 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 9 3 10 7 128 QAM 11 0 8 9 84 23 5 30 30 28 26 5 8 3 7 1 7 ver 2 3 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 3 5 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit rH Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 6 49 97 9 5 15 123 12 19 14 0 16 4 16 QAM 12 96 90 15 0 22130 20 26 5 13 3 15 7 32 QAM 15 12 1 87 18 5 24 30 22 26 5 12 3 14 7 64 QAM 18 14 3 84 20 5 29 30 26 26 5 11 3 12 7 128 QAM 21 17 2 81 23 5 30 30 28 26 5 9 1 3 8 7 256 QAM 2
118. 9 9 64 QAM 72 62 3 79 21 5 28 34 26 30 14 3 17 7 128 QAM 84 73 6 75 25 0 30 37 28133 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 96 81 2 73 28 0 33 40 31 36 10 0 12 4 ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 28 30 MHz ACCP operation Raw User RSS SNR for Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivity Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit El Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 50 36 8 91 7 5 12 23 10 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 100 80 9 83 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 125 102 4 79 18 5 24 33 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 150 129 8 76 21 5 28 34 26 30 12 3 15 7 128QAM 175 155 5 72 25 0 30 35 28 32 9 5 12 8 256 QAM 200 170 7 70 26 5 33 40 31 36 6 0 9 4 ver 2 1 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Channel spacing 28 30 MHz ACAP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for J J ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 52 38 3 89 5 7 5 12 23 10 19 15 0 17 4 16 QAM 104 84 1 82 5 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 12
119. 9 5 10332 5 10500 5 10388 5 10556 5 10339 5 10507 5 10395 5 10563 5 10346 5 10514 5 10402 5 10570 5 10353 5 10521 5 10409 5 10577 5 10360 5 10528 5 10416 5 10584 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ver 2 0 182 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAv2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies y Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 14 MHz VO R 14 12 2012 17 duplex range 70 273 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo10_A_default 6 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 0 RAv2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies y Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 28 MHz VO R 14 12 2012 17 duplex range 84 252 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo1O A default 6 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10378 10546 10406 10574 ver 2 0 RAv2 10 xA TX channel nominal frequencies Y Band 10 30 10 59 GHz default duplex 168 MHz Bandwidth 56 MHz Channel arrangements based on 7 MHz duplex range 112 224 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo10_A_default 6 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10392 10560 ver 2 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 183 Technical parameters 10 3 4 Nominal frequencies band 10 15 10 65 GHz TX channel nominal frequencies RAy2 10 xB y Band 10 15 10 65
120. 93 5 24097 0 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24132 0 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Bandwidth 40 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 70 MHz duplex spacing range 70 105 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 I8M150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz L7 24027 0 Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz 24023 5 U27 24097 0 24030 5 24034 0 24037 5 24041 0 24044 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 Ch No Upper MHz 24093 5 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 ver 1 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 237 Technical parameters TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 87 5 MHz Bandwidth 50 MHz duplex spacing range 84 94 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_15M150 2 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz RAy2 24 U31 24111 0 24027 0 U32 24114 5 L8 240305 U33 24118 0 24034 0 U34 24121 5 24037 5 ver 1 0 TX channel nominal frequencies RAy2 24 q Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 84 MHz Bandwidth 56 MHz duplex spacing range 84 87 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 18M150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upp
121. Ay2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Radio type Polarization Bandwidth MHz Frequency input TX channel GHz RX channel GHz Duplex spacing MHz ACM TX modulation ATPC ATPC RSS threshold dBm TX power dBm Antenna gain dBi EIRP limit dBm Radio unit type L ower or U pper part of the frequency band Horizontal or vertical polarization based on the physical installation Indic ates the polarization of the received signal Local and Peer are indicated separately The proper position of the cable is sideways down Notice for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links One side of the link must be installed in vertical polarization and the other in horizontal polarization One of the standard channel widths can be selected This parameter must be set identically in local and remote Enable manual input if supported TX and RX frequencies GHz are manually entered It is possible to disconnect the TX RX lock and select TX and RX channels individually Corresponding channels at peer unit are set automatically TX and RX channels are selected from a list of channels The basic con figuration has the TX and RX options interconnected In this case the basic duplex spacing between channels is preserved and by selecting one channel the other three are defined as well For units operating in free bands it is possible to disconnect the TX RX lock and select TX and RX channels individually Corresponding
122. C fw 2 1 x x 12 11 2015 PRACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS RAy2 Microwave Link version 1 13 RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 59231 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu Table of Contents IMPOMANUINOUCC a a O IDE EOS 7 QUICK QUITO M 8 List of documaerntatlon A A er TETUR ee 10 To RAY2 Microwave LINK ice ode eee tita e avi te o ie E e tute Mont feet tS Y 11 2 Implementation Notes ssssssssssseeeeneeneemeeemn nennen enhn eee geese Ennn n nent nenne nnn nnne 12 2 1 Link CalCulatiOn 2 rU PERRO aaa 12 2 1 1 Free space loss calculation sse 12 2 1 2 Link budget calculation usina cad dd cunctae 12 2 3123 Fei MATI oci coh tos Mish SA cd esee for teet br de Mite teme taint kat sa add 13 2 1 4 Rain attenuation snrnid ae eraai nono non nn EEEE REAA EAEE Ea TEE EE EEE ar A FRETT 13 2 1 5 Multipath fading sta A e a E A E eae 16 2 1 6 Fresnel zones calculation sceno e aa ae Ea aS 17 2 2 Example of microwave link design ccccsseeccseceeeeeeeeeteceeneeestensenseseneceeepenenssenteneeeeetenneses 18 EA LOI RARA 21 SM eise D Emm 22 2 2 GOnnectors ee rh Prts ieget getto ados 22 ID POWESUDDIY ect PCT 23 3 4 Status LEDS cecinere a e UR a edd 25 2315 Techinical paratmieters oe e eet A A ede o i e a e e o a d eed 25 3 6 DImenslions
123. C priority MAC priority Trunk member Trunk Id Trunk port assotiation vector Add entry Edit Copy Delete Flush all and The Entry state parameter is used to determine the entry s age or its type as follows static Use for ordinary static entry static policy Use for Policy DA and or Policy SA menu Switch settings Advanced Monitoring Policy static non Use for SA non rate limit and or DA non rate limit menu Switch set rate limiting tings Interface PIRL static man This value is used for the mapping of the DA even if the DA mapping agement parameter is disabled menu Switch settings Advanced ATU settings dynamic Ordinary dynamic entry Use this parameter to enable the MAC priority see MAC priority description The MAC s Priority override value when enabled by the Use MAC priority parameter Used for priority override on ingressing frames Enabling a priority on a MGMT MAC address will override all priorities for these MGMT frames Enabling a priority on a static non MGMT MAC address will only override the frame s priority if the port s DA priority override or SA priority override parameters are enabled When this parameter is enabled the MAC address is a member of a trunk according to the Trunk Id parameter When this parameter is disabled the MAC address is as sociated with port s according to the Port association parameter The Trunk ID associated with this MAC address
124. CP Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface gt Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Local Unit A 09 01 Link Ok 802 1p DSCP Control Port name p2 Eth1 getman p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Enabled Prefer O O O O Mapping DSCP Queue DSCP Queue DSCP Queue DSCP Queue o o MM 16 1 MM 32 2 Mi 48 3 amp 10M 7h i Ml Bae 49 3 iM 2 019 15 1 W 3 2 MI 50 3 IM 3 019 19 1 E 35 2 MM 51 3 iM 4 0 Ba 20 1 l9 36 2 MJ 52 3 IM 5 0 21 1 372 533 w 6 0w 214 38 2M 54 3 7 019 23 1 ae 39 2 M 55 3 iM 80v 24 1v 40 2 5634 90M 25 1 MM 41 2 MM 57 3 M 10 0 wv 26 1 vw 42 2 vw 58 3 v 14M 0 M 27 1 8 43 2 M 59 3 iM 12 0 9j 23 1 M 4 2 M 60 3 M 13 0 Sd 29 1 IJ 45 2 Be 61 3 M 4 0 30 1M 46 2w 62 3 4 15 0 w 34 1 47 2 63 3 vw Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 30 Menu Switch settings DSCP The DSCP stands for Differentiated services Code Point which is a 6 bit value stored within the IP header The QoS techniques using those bits are called DiffServ or Differentiated services Port name Enabled Prefer DSCP 0 63 Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2
125. CP ACCP QPSK 2 1 4 2 7 5 17 6 32 6 33 8 44 3 64 7 76 1 2 3 4 6 8 3 19 6 36 5 37 9 49 6 72 3 85 2 16 QAM 4 3 8 4 15 1 34 3 71 7 74 6 97 5 142 1 150 7 4 8 9 3 17 0 38 5 80 2 83 4 109 2 159 0 168 6 32 QAM 5 4 10 6 19 6 43 4 90 7 94 3 123 4 179 9 182 9 6 0 11 9 21 8 48 6 1015 105 6 138 2 201 3 204 8 64 QAM 6 5 12 6 26 1 55 2 115 1 1197 156 6 228 0 238 1 7 2 14 1 29 3 61 7 128 8 133 9 175 3 255 1 266 4 128 QAM 7 8 15 1 30 7 65 2 138 0 143 5 187 7 269 7 274 5 8 7 17 0 34 3 73 0 154 5 160 5 209 9 301 6 307 1 256 QAM 17 4 36 1 71 9 151 5 164 4 206 1 300 2 318 8 19 4 40 3 80 5 169 5 184 0 230 7 335 8 356 5 ver 1 1 174 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters ACM switching according to SNR state RAy2 xx SNR degrade improve dB 1 75 3 5 7 14 20 28 40 50 56 56 Mr MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHzTO ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP QPSK 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 19 0 16 QAM 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 17 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 32 QAM 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 5 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 26 0 64 QAM 23 0 23 0 230 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 23 0 24 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5 28 5
126. ED ALARM Radio link up 2015 04 02T09 55 27 0000 MINOR ALARM RSS under limit 105 5dBm 2015 04 02T09 55 27 0000 CLEARED ALARM RSS Local events 2015 04 02T10 15 03 0000 LINK Connection to peer 10233353 established 2015 04 02T10 15 21 0000 WDOG Start watchdog attending 2015 04 02T10 16 03 0000 MBAS Modem temperature 39 9 Peer alarms 2015 04 02T10 14 56 0000 CLEARED ALARM Air Speed 2015 04 02T10 15 01 0000 MINOR ALARM SNR under limit 4 8dB 2015 04 02T10 15 02 0000 CLEARED ALARM SNR Peer events 2015 04 02T10 15 02 0000 MBAS Radio temperature 33 0 2015 04 02T10 15 13 0000 WDOG Start watchdog attending 2015 04 02T10 16 02 0000 MBAS Modem temperature 44 1 Refresh Fig 7 54 Menu Tools Logs When you first open the screen it is necessary to start browsing logs by pressing the Refresh button Maximum length of displayed logs is 250 entries If you need to display longer history use of CLI interface is needed Overall Local alarms Peer alarms Local events Peer events Filter Displays the last 3 records from all types of logs Alarms from Local or Peer unit Events from Local or Peer unit Listings of all logs can be filtered You can enter text in the upper left corner window for filtering listings For example you want to know when the configuration of the unit was modified On the Local events screen enter Configuration and hit Enter You can use plain text or regular expre
127. EO H 157 7 60 97 PIOgF alils case eode A rte uer cl sade f epe A 158 ela 162 8 Command Line Interface sse nennen nnne nnne n nnn n nne n nennen nnne nenne 165 8 1 Connection via CL iii nee er ee rk E 165 MEN DERE 165 81 25 TY estes t o dt ER E DE E sa n ta rt la 165 Oreo SSE eerte taut tertii iuto rentes LEES EN Ire ML E EE Ie eoo ELE d 165 8 2 Working with CL i hne Re HR hk Re ke e RH PNE de ERES ERE RAN NEN NR TERRE EXER e ERR YES RR 166 8 21 SSH KOyS sce estes eme ru ari ent erre end e aee Pod e uU Oo e qa d ne tute eso 167 Liz COS it o a 167 8 3 COMMOMPAtION with CEE o e etti due na Heu coat ia 168 8 3 1 Configuration file rune sates oct ayeuts cect sacanvuewdsacteuspecesbesestdes 168 9 3 2 gt Firr ware Upgrade aid A A IA eects tt a Net 168 8 3 3 Remote unit authorization oooooocinicnnninnnnnnnncnccnnccnnncnnnn eet tee nn rn nn 168 9 roues Gol ig iiti ota i somit eret s hece tats tita m tete LA I iH cdd 170 10 Technical parameters eren kde RES RES EX RR CERNI X ER dis 172 10 1 General parameters 5 ere rtc eerte ia 172 10 1 1 Technical parameters overview coococcoccoocococooonoonnnonononononnoncnoncnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnos 172 107152 EInKSD860 o 6e O O E 174 10 2 Nominal frequency tables description sssssssss HH 176 10 3 RAy2 10 Parameters ii er ug ete aoe ee 177 10 3 1 Upper Lower Limits ntn enr eee e detener Mea ate 177 10 3 2
128. FTP Cat5e cable TELDOR Double shell outdoor FTP Cat7 cable PEWTRONIC Connector TC CON STP RJ45 Cat6 8p8c wire pleated AWG24 UBNT Set RJ45 connector Telegartner and cable bushing lengthening 35mm SFP module RJ45 interface 40 C to 85 C Avago SFP module 2 fibres LC 10km 40 C to 85 C APAC Opto Fibre cable patchcord pigtail CAB FIB 2F DLC DLC OFA 5m Fibre patch cord 2 fibres single mode LC connector LC connector OFA 5m CAB FIB 1F LC LC OFA 5m Fibre patch cord 1 fibre single mode LC connector LC connector OFA 5m CAB FIB 2F DLC x OFA 5m Fibre pigtail 2 fibres single mode LC connector loose end OFA 5 m CAB FIB 1F LC x OFA 5m Fibre pigtail 1 fibre single mode LC connector loose end OFA 5 m DC amp Fibre cable patchcord CAB HYB 2F DLC DLC DC power cable Fibre patchcord 2 fibres OFA 030m DC cable CAB DC 2x1 5 DC surge protection OTH DP 024 RAy grounding kit KIT GROUDING 1 4 KIT GROUDING RAY Access adapters OTH W1 WIFI SET X5 ETH USB DC power cable 2x1 5 mm silicone rubber Overvoltage protection DC 24V LPZ1 LPZ2 IP20 40 85 C Saltek Grounding kit for antenna cable Grounding kit for mast grounding Wifi adapter Ethernet adapter RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 29 Accessories 4 2 Details Antenna S Y The overview of different Jirous antenna types is listed in Section 3 6 Dimensions The antenna choice de
129. G This task takes a few minutes to complete Do ol u not interrupt the power supply during the operation Restore Applying Factory settings to Local unit The unit reboots itself factory settings after applying all changes Restore It is possible to bring the unit to Factory settings by holding factory settings the hardware button depressed during unit s boot The HW HW button button is located next to the DC connector within the port marked P Disconnect the power supply from the unit Keep the HW button depressed while reconnecting the power The LED marked SYS starts to flash red after a few seconds Keep the HW button pressed another 5 seconds until the red status LED stops flashing The unit s boot up sequence continues and Factory settings are applied Should the HW button be released when the status LED is in the red flashing phase but before the 5 s guard time the unit stays in Service mode Please leave this mode by re booting the unit Diagnostic To facilitate communication with the technical support you can create an archive file package with detailed information about the unit If connection with Peer unit is active the Local amp Peer diagnostic information from both units are saved Create Saving a file with information about the unit Local and Peer amp download file NOTE This task takes a few minutes to complete Management SNMP MIB Provides Management Information Base table Information Base 144 RAy2 M
130. GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 1 75 MHz Based on 3 5 MHz channels B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No 0 4001 0 n2nD NN OCOANDAARWBN 000 22 BRHRHBWWWWWWWWWWNNNNNNN NA OODANDABRWN A OOAND OT FW Lower MHz 10151 375 10153 125 10154 875 10156 625 10158 375 10160 125 10161 875 10163 625 10165 375 10167 125 10168 875 10170 625 10172 375 10174 125 10175 875 10177 625 10179 375 10181 125 10182 875 10184 625 10186 375 10188 125 10189 875 10191 625 10193 375 10195 125 10196 875 10198 625 10200 375 10202 125 10203 875 10205 625 10207 375 10209 125 10210 875 10212 625 10214 375 10216 125 10217 875 10219 625 10221 375 10223 125 Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10501 375 10224 875 10574 875 10503 125 10226 625 10576 625 10504 875 10228 375 10578 375 10506 625 10230 125 10580 125 10508 375 10231 875 10581 875 10510 125 10233 625 10583 625 10511 875 10235 375 10585 375 10513 625 10237 125 10587 125 10515 375 10238 875 10588 875 10517 125 10240 625 10590 625 10518 875 10242 375 10592 375 10520 625 10244 125 10594 125 10522 375 10245 875 10595 875 10524 125 10247 625 10597 625 10525 875 10249 375 10599 375 10527 625 10251 125 10601 125 10529 375 10252 875 10602 875 10531 125 10254 625 10604 625 10532 875 10256 375 10606 375 10534 625 10258 125 10608 125 10536 375 10259 875 10609 875 10538 125 10261 625 10611 625 10539 875 1
131. It is possible to record up to 3 addresses separated by commas Enable LED status indicators on the body of the unit You can turn off all LEDs with this option Watching over connection of both link units In case of prolonged failure 10 min a cold restart is performed the equivalent of turning off the power Off by default Internal link watchdog 74 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration USB accessories USB service connector can be used as a service port to the Local unit only USB to Ethernet and USB to WiFi adapters can be used Status Local RAy2 17L 09 18 Link Ok Link settings Services USBaccessories Users General i Local Peer Radio IPv4 address 169 254 169 168 28 169 254 170 168 28 gt Service access DHCP start 169 254 169 161 169 254 170 161 DHCP end 169 254 169 166 169 254 170 166 Alarms Switch settings Ethernet adapter Status Enable DHCP enable Y Interface Qos WiFi adapter Advanced Enable Tools DHCP enable Maintenance SSID Encryption WPA2 WPA2 Live data Passphrase Histo y Mode 802 11g v 802 11n v Logs Channel 1 v 1 v Programs Help Apply Cancel Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 10 Menu Link settings Service access USB accessories IPv4 address Unit service management address when connecting via USB port DHCP start DHCP range for dynamic address allocation of the management client DHCP end conne
132. LYZER Spectrum analyzer mode active User data are not transferred RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 63 Configuration All link states except for the state of OK are highlighted with a triangle Status Local Location_A 08 27 O Alarm Link Sinale Peer Location_B 08 27 Settings Brief Detailed General E Device Fig 7 4 Status bar 2 Example of a complete page status bar menu and control buttons RAy2 Microwave Link e Status Local RAy2 17L 09 30 Link Ok Peer RAyA Link settings Brief Detailed General General Local Peer Service access LED indicators ASE ASE Alarms Unit code RAy2 17 RAy2 17 Station name RAy2 17L RAy2 17U Switch settings Inside temperature GP 43 7 48 0 Status Voltage V 54 8 54 6 Interface Radio Qos Local Peer Net bitrate Mbps 4 90 Egress limit ON 4 90 Egress limit ON Advanced Bandwidth MHz 3 5 MHz 3 5 MHz Tools TX channel GHz L1 17 105000 U22 17 178500 RX channel GHz U22 17 178500 L1 17 105000 Maintenance TX modulation QPSK QPSK Live data TX power dBm v 20 20 Hist RSS dBm v 714 71 3 SNR dB v 28 9 32 6 Logs BER 0 00e 00 0 00e 00 uae Switch interface Help Local Peer Egress rate limit Air 4 00 Mbps L1 auto 4 00 Mbps L1 auto Link mode Eth1 down down Link mode Eth2 down 1000 Mbps full Service access Local Peer IPv4 address 192 168 141 226 24 192 168 141 227 24 Management VLAN off off Services Web
133. M 175 155 5 72 25 0 30 35 28 132 9 5 12 8 256 QAM 200 170 7 69 26 5 33 35 31 32 6 5 9 8 ver 2 0 RAy2 17 Channel spacing 40 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 68 50 1 88 7 5 12 33 10 29 22 4 24 8 16 QAM 136 110 0 81 15 0 19 33 17 29 18 4 21 8 32 QAM 170 139 2 77 18 5 24 33 21 29 16 4 19 8 64 QAM 204 176 5 74 21 5 27 133 25129 14 4 16 8 128QAM 238 211 4 70 25 0 30 37 28 133 10 4 12 8 256 QAM 272 232 1 68 26 5 33 37 30 33 8 4 10 8 ver 2 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 207 Technical parameters RAy2 17 Channel spacing 50 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 90 66 3 87 5 7 5 12 23 10 19 24 0 26 4 16 QAM 180 145 6 80 5 15 0 19
134. PuTTY client Access is protected by a key The key can be in Linux format and it begins BEGIN DSA PRIVATE KEY or in PuTTY format which begins PuTTY User Key File 2 ssh dss To convert the Linux format to PuTTY do the following In c Program Files putty directory run PUTTYGEN EXE z PuTTY Key Generator File Key Conversions Help Key No key Actions Generate a public private key pair Load an existing private key file Save the generated key Parameters Type of key to generate O SSH1 RSA SSH2 RSA O SSH2 DSA Number of bits in a generated key 1024 Click on Load and choose the Linux private key In the next window type your password into the Key passphrase and Confirm passphrase fields After that click Save private key Choose location and save the key 256 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o SSH key generation PuTTY access with key In PuTTY menu fill in the address e g root 192 168 169 169 and the name of the link e g RAy 17 Racom zx PuTTY Configuration 8 EEE i n Specify your connection by host name or IP address Terminal uri Host Name or IP address Port Bell root 192 168 169 169 22 Features Protocol Window O Raw O Telnet ORlogin 9 SSH Appearance Behavi Load save or delete a stored session aviour Translation Saved Sessions RAY 10G Racom Default Settings RAY 10G Racom Close window on e
135. RAy2 are used in an appropriate manner within a well constructed network RAy2 should not be used in situations where failure to transmit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or any other party including but not limited to personal injury death or loss of property RACOM accepts no liability for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or received using RAy2 or for the failure of RAy2 to transmit or receive such data Under no circumstances is RACOM or any other company or person responsible for incidental accidental or related damage arising as a result of the use of this product RACOM does not provide the user with any form of guarantee containing assurance of the suitability and applicability for its application e RACOM products are not developed designed or tested for use in applications which may directly affect health and or life functions of humans or animals nor to be a component of similarly important systems and RACOM does not provide any guarantee when company products are used in such applications RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 7 Quick guide Quick guide Accessing units Default IP addresses 192 168 169 169 24 L unit Username admin 192 168 169 170 24 U unit Password admin Set computer IP address within the IP range 192 168 169 1 255 Web browser access https 192 168 169 169 L unit or https 192 168 169 170 U unit Accept the
136. Radio parameters ooococccicccncccicnnccnoconnncnn nn 178 10 3 3 Nominal frequencies band 10 30 10 59 GHZ sseeseeeeeeennn 181 10 3 4 Nominal frequencies band 10 15 10 65 GHZ occcncnccccccccononcncnnnnnonononenincnnonenon 184 10 4 RAy2 11 A B parameters sesessssssssesessessseeete nennen nnne eaa a aini 188 10 4 1 Upper Lower Limits sssssss HH RH Hmmm nemen 188 10 4 2 Radio parameters sssssssssssssssssssesseeeeeeeene nennen enne nen nennen nnne nnn 189 10 4 3 Nominal frequencies duplex 490 MHZ sse 192 10 4 4 Nominal frequencies duplex 530 MHZ sse 198 10 5 RAy2 11 C D parameters ssssssssss Hee ene ennemis 204 10 6 RAy2 17 parameters id 205 10 6 1 Upper Lower Limits c ren a Hmmm nemen 205 4 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 10 6 2 Radio parameters n ei a mener nennen 206 10 6 3 Nominal frequencies ssssssssssee Hmm mere nme 209 10 7 RAy2 24 Parameters uri 216 TOMA pper Eower Limits et preter e e prep er eret 216 10 72 Radio parameters ete rae poe et era ri eaa e EU Ci 217 10 7 3 Nominal frequencies 24 00 24 25 GHZ sse 220 10 7 4 Nominal frequencies 24 05 24 25 GHZ sssssssssssseeee eee 227 10 7 5 Nominal frequencies 24 00 24 15 GHZ cococccococococccoonocononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 234 11 Safety
137. SFP module read error n a no SFP option Port enable The port can be enabled or disabled WARNING When the port is disabled no communication is possible through this port Auto negotiation Auto Negotiation is an Ethernet procedure by which two connected devices choose common transmission parameters such as speed duplex mode and flow control In this process the connected devices first share their capabilities regarding these parameters and then choose the highest performance transmission mode they both support The device supports three types of Auto Negotiation 10 100 1000BASE T Copper Auto Negotiation IEEE 802 3 Clauses 28 and 40 1000BASE X Fiber Auto Negotiation IEEE 802 3 Clause 37 SGMII Auto Negotiation Cisco specification Auto Negotiation provides a mechanism for transferring information from the local unit to the link partner to establish speed duplex and Master Slave preference during a link session Auto Negotiation is initiated upon any of the following conditions Power up reset Hardware reset Software reset Restart Auto Negotiation Transition from power down to power up The link goes down The 10 100 1000BASE T Auto Negotiation is based on Clause 28 and 40 of the IEEE 802 3 specification It is used to negotiate speed duplex and flow control over CAT5 or higher UTP cable Once Auto Negotiation is initiated the device determines whether or not the remote device has Auto Negotiation capability If so
138. T master mode auto Energy detect sense pulse Apply Refresh Show defaults Show backup Fig 7 22 Menu Switch settings Port Phyter is responsible for Ethernet signal conversion between wire e g CAT7 cable and internal switch bus Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 Link status Ethernet link status can be down type no link signal detected up type link signal detected The type of the physical layer is indicated after the slash copper metallic Ethernet interface SFP SFP module can be either optic or metallic Speed duplex Ethernet link Speed and duplex Speed 10 100 1000 Mbps Duplex full half SFP info Information about the optionally inserted SFP module The three different types of SFP modules can be used Fibre dual mode with LC connector 92 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Fibre single mode with LC connector Copper with RJ45 connector There can be one of the following scenarios scenario message SFP OK The SFP vendor string read out of SFP module The vendor model connector RJ45 LC and wavelength values are shown Separate window with more detailed information can be opened by clicking the more link No SFP No
139. U VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Trunk Radio Global Balancing mode XOR v Service access Ports settings Alarms Portname p2Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Switch settings Enabled L O Status Trunk Id 0 0 0 0 Interface Balancing Qos 0 v Y Y Y gt Advanced 1 v v v v Tools 2 v Y y 7 E 3 Y Y Y Y Maintenance 4 Y Y Y Y Live data 5 Y Y y Y History 6 Y Y Y Y Logs 7 v Y v Y Programs Help Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 42 Menu Switch settings Advanced Trunk Port trunking is supported by the device using any combinations of ports The ports that are to be as sociated with the trunk need to have all the port members defined with the same Trunk ld and the Enabled parameter has to be enabled When a frame enters a Trunk Port its Source Address SA is learned with its association to the ingress port s TrunkID number In this way the contents of the address database contain the same association with the frame s SA regardless of the link of the trunk the frame entered the switch When frames are routed back toward a trunk the frame will have its Destination Address DA found from the address database If the frame s DA is unknown the frame will try to flood out all ports of the trunk this is OK in so far as this will be fixed with load balancing If the frame s DA is found the entry will indicate mapping to a trunk and the entry s DPV bits will contain the TrunkID associated with this frame s DA This TrunkID needs to
140. Upper MHz 24009 5 24016 5 24023 5 24030 5 24037 5 24044 5 24051 5 24058 5 24065 5 24072 5 24079 5 ver 1 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 235 Technical parameters RAy2 24 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 87 5 MHz Bandwidth 14 MHz duplex spacing range 66 5 129 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_1SM150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24076 0 24079 5 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24009 5 24013 0 24100 5 24016 5 24104 0 24020 0 24107 5 24023 5 24027 0 24114 5 24030 5 24118 0 24034 0 24121 5 24037 5 24041 0 24128 5 24044 5 24132 0 24048 0 24135 5 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 24065 5 24069 0 24072 5 ver 1 0 236 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 28 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 84 MHz duplex spacing range 70 115 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 I8M150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz L4 24016 5 L12 24044 5 Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz U28 24100 5 24020 0 24023 5 24027 0 24030 5 24034 0 24037 5 24041 0 U36 24128 5 24048 0 24051 5 24055 0 24058 5 24062 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24086 5 24090 0 240
141. Values in the VID determine search results from the VTU table These are created manually The SID index enabled ports in terms of STP FID index for searching in the address table ATU taken from this search result are assigned to the frame This FID will overwrite the FID from menu VLAN Based on this the VTU can also overwrite the priority of this frame The permitted output ports and method of working with VLAN tag on the output are also defined here STU The Spanning tree protocol in this table maintains the status of ports from the viewpoint of the authorized network throughput and the learning of routing Protocol MSTP is used Each VTU entry uses some of the entries in the STU Entries in the ATU are created in accordance with these assigned states The port state behaviour is determined by the STP ATU settings Any assigned parameters dictate how the ATU table should be used The Global section of this menu provides for passage of MGMT frames e g BPDU In the Port settings section the behaviour of individual port is defined RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 115 Configuration Behaviour of the ATU table in terms of automatically creating records Learning Hold at 1 ATU refresh Learn limit Discarding frames according to the source addresses Handling frames with unfamiliar destination addresses The frames priority can be overridden by the SA or the DA ATU The ATU table determines the
142. Weight table 3 2 3 1 3 2 3 0 3 2 3 1 3 2 3 Note The sequence of the egress queues can be up to 128 items long Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 28 Menu Switch settings Egress queue Port name Scheduling mode Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Port s Scheduling mode The device supports strict priority weighted round robin or a mixture on a per egress port selection basis In the strict priority scheme all top priority frames egress for a port until that priority s queue is empty then the next lower priority queue s frames egress etc This ap proach can cause the lower priorities to be starved out preventing them from transmitting any frames but also ensures that all high priority frames egress the switch as soon as possible In the weighted scheme an 8 4 2 1 weighting is applied to the four priorities unless an alternate weighting is programmed into the QoS Weights Table This approach prevents the lower priority frames from being starved out with only a slight delay to the higher priority frames 108
143. X ch Interface RX ch Bandwidth MHz Duple One of the standard channel widths can be selected This parameter must be set identically QoS ACM in local and remote Advanced TX m CLI Tools name RADIO BANDWIDTH ATPC possible values e g 3 5 7 14 28 40 56 see User manual Maintenance ATPC cli cnf show grep RADIO cli cnf set RADIO BANDWIDTH 3 5 Live data bac an Go to help Fig 7 58 Parameter help There is a Go to help link within the help text It displays the whole configuration menu help RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 163 Configuration Status Local RAy2 17L 07 37 Link settings Hel General Radio Go to Radio Service access Radio Setup of general parameters of the radio link Alarms Radio type Switch settings Radio unit type L ower or U pper part of the frequency band Interface cli info station QoS Polarization Advanced Horizontal or vertical polarization based on the physical installation Indicates the polarization of the receivec Peer are indicated separately The proper position of the cable is sideways down Fig 7 59 Configuration menu help There is a link on each help screen which points to the respective configuration screen Clicking the question mark icon in the upper right corner of the configuration screen brings a summary help for the configuration screen in the pop up window Local RAy2 17L 07 43 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17U 07 43 Ping CLI Destination Size B Co
144. X channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 87 5 MHz Bandwidth 50 MHz duplex spacing range 84 143 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM200 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz RAy2 24 24163 5 24079 5 24167 0 L23 24083 0 U48 24170 5 24086 5 24174 0 24090 0 24177 5 24093 5 24181 0 24097 0 24184 5 24100 5 24188 0 24104 0 24191 5 24107 5 24195 0 24111 0 24198 5 241145 24202 0 24118 0 24205 5 24121 5 24209 0 24125 0 24212 5 24128 5 24216 0 24132 0 24219 5 L38 24135 5 U63 24223 0 24139 0 ver 1 1 232 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 56 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 05 24 25 GHz default duplex sp 84 MHz duplex spacing range 84 140 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 18M200 13 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L22 24079 5 U46 24163 5 L38 24135 5 U62 24219 5 Ch No Lower MHz 24083 0 24086 5 24090 0 24093 5 24097 0 24100 5 24104 0 24107 5 24111 0 24114 5 24118 0 24121 5 24125 0 24128 5 24132 0 Ch No Upper MHz 24167 0 24170 5 24174 0 24177 5 24181 0 24184 5 24188 0 24191 5 24195 0 24198 5 24202 0 24205 5 24209 0 24212 5 24216 0 ver 2 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwav
145. access by default admin admin This works if Service access Services Telnet is checked in https access 8 1 2 Putty Connection using putty client Type this into the Host Name or IP address field admin 192 168 169 169 Click Open Then enter the password admin This procedure without key is subject to selection Service access Services SSH oninhttps access If you own the private key part then you do not need a password In putty continue by selecting Connection SSH Auth and selecting path to file with key e g key ppk Use Session Logging to save the putty configuration To access the unit via CLI simply select the connection in putty and click Open 8 1 3 SSH Connection using client ssh in Linux ssh admin 192 168 169 169 i key If you know the password and itis enabled in Service access Services SSH onlykey in https access you can skip the key and use password in the next query RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 165 Command Line Interface 8 2 Working with CLI Overview of CLI options cli help Fig 8 1 CLI menu Parameters of CLI commands are listed in the help For example h help listing t target unit t 1 local default option t b both both units command item for remote unit has PEER_ prefix t p peer opposite unit when reading using the show command When inserting commands using the tabulator can help An incorrect command is rejected e g inserting for
146. adjustment if enabled is added to the Egress Rate Control s calculated transmitted byte count meaning Egress Rate Control must be enabled for this Frame Overhead adjustment to work Weight table The weighted round robin alternate weighting can be defined here The sequence of the output queue numbers 0 1 2 or 3 defines the sequence of the output queue frame egressing This sequence can be up to 128 items long 110 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration 7 5 3 QoS The Qos classification is handled in the switch Ingress block The Ingress block does not perform the QoS switching policy which is the task of the Queue Controller See the Functional diagram 802 1p Status Local Unit A 08 56 Link Ok Peer Unit B 08 5 Link settings 802 1p DSCP General Radio Control Port name p2 Eth1 getman p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Service access Enabled Alarms Prefer Switch settings MC 0 v 0 v 0 v 0 Status CoS remap Interface 0 0 3 0 re 0 3 0 QoS 1 1 v 1 v 1 v 1 Advanced 2 2 v 2 v 2 v 2 Tools 3 3 Y 3 M 3 x 3 Maintenance 4 4 xi 4 x 4 x 4 5 Live data E Y 5 M Y 2 6 6 Y 6 Y 6 6 History 7 6 v 7 v 7 v 7 Logs Programs Mapping Class of service Queue Help 0 0 3 1 0 v 2 1 v 3 1 v 4 2 v 5 2 v 6 3 v E 3 h e Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 29 Menu Switch settings 802 1p The IEEE 802 1p QoS technique also known as class of service CoS is a 3 bit field called the Priority Code Point PCP
147. al number Station name Station name assigned by user Station location Station location assigned by user Firmware version Unit s firmware version Date Time The internal real time clock The clock is set manually or it is synchronized with NTP server and set for both units Inside temperature C Temperature inside the unit on the modem board Voltage V Unit s power supply voltage level Power supply The power supply input the unit is powered from PoE unit is powered via Ethernet cable plugged into port ETH1 POE AUX unit is powered via DC cable plugged into port P 7 3 2 Status Radio Radio type Radio unit type L Lower or U Upper part of the frequency band Polarization Horizontal or vertical polarization based on the physical installation Indic ates the polarization of the received signal Local and Peer are indicated separately The proper position of the cable is sideways down Notice for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links One side of the link must be installed in vertical polarization and the other in horizontal polarization Frequency table Displays the currently used frequency table in format lt name version gt Net bitrate Mbps Current transfer capacity of radio channel for user data Max net bitrate Mbps The maximum RF channel capacity according to installed feature key Bandwidth MHz One of the standard channel widths can be selected This parameter must be set identically in local and remote TX a
148. ame Spanning tree ID record number for STP Spanning Tree Protocol prevents a loop in the network Spanning Tree Unit parameters associated with STP Forwarding Information Database number according to this runs searching in the table Address Translation Unit conversion FID and DA to number of output port Management frames service frames of the microwave link frames ATU Entry state static management and frames ATU settings Reserved Bridge Protocol Data Unit frames used by STP protocol Spanning tree protocol by ports Spanning tree protocol by VLAN tagging of frames VLAN priority by 2 nd layer tagged frames Ethernet Differentiated Services Code Point priority by 3 rd layer IP packet Quality of Service Frame Priority priority in the network Queue Priority priority of the frame inside the switch here in the sense of aggregation ethernet links conjunction multiple ports into a single line another meaning is VLAN aggregation lines multiple VLANs on a single port RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 117 Configuration VLAN Status Local RAy2 17L 10 00 Peer RAy2 17 Link settings wem VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP T Radio Global Link authorization guard Service access r Remove one provider tag O Alarms ARP without broadcast checking Switch settings Seien Ports settings Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Interface Egress unmodify v unmodify
149. ame going out onto the wire is tagged Rate kbps Egress data rate shaping When Rate 0 egress rate limiting is disabled fps NOTE The Count mode parameter is used to control which bytes in the trans mitted frames are counted for egress rate limiting If the egress shaping is controlled by frame rate the desired frame rate can vary from 7 6k to 1 488M frames per second Valid values are between 7600 and 1488000 If the egress shaping is controlled by bit rate the desired rate can vary from 64 kbps to 1 Gbps in the following increments Desired rate between 64 kbps and 1 Mbps in increments of 64 kbps Desired rate between 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in increments of 1 Mbps Desired rate between 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps in increments of 10 Mbps Therefore the valid values are 64 128 192 256 320 384 960 1000 2000 3000 4000 100000 110000 120000 130000 1000000 Frame overhead Egress Rate Frame Overhead adjustment B This parameter is used to adjust the number of bytes that need to be added to a frame s IFG inter frame gap on a per frame basis This is to compensate for a protocol mismatch between the sending and the receiving stations For example if the receiving station were to add more encapsulations to the frame for the nodes RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 109 Configuration further down stream this per frame adjustment would help reduce the congestion in the receiving station This
150. atabase This field entry ensures each record is unique and must not be duplicated Port name Ports Eth1 Eth2 CPU Air See Port status Id Each port can be assigned up to five different ingress rate resources Each resource defines a rule filter for the incoming frame If the rule is met the frame is affected as set by the EBS limit action parameter If the incoming frame doesn t meet any rule it is not affected by PIRL The frame is accepted and forwar ded further to the switch engine CIR estimated The Committed Information Rate CIR is dependent on the Bucket Rate factor and the Bucket increment The calculation is estimated as the real data throughput depends on frame size The Accounted bytes parameter affects this as well The formula for the CIR in bits per second is as follows CIR a BRF BI Where a is constant which is 12 500 000 for Accounted bytes frame and is 100 000 000 for Accounted bytes layer1 BRF is Bucket Rate factor and Bl is Bucket increment Bucket rate This is a factor which determines the amount of tokens that need to be decremented factor for each rate resource decrement which is done periodically based on the Com mitted Information Rate Bucket Bucket increment BI indicates the amount of tokens that need to be added for increment each byte of the incoming frame Mode Rate type or Traffic type of rate limiting See Bucket type parameter Edit Press Edit to edit selected
151. ation H V Rain zone aH av K L MN P Q 4 aH av 3 AB CD EF GH K LM NP Q Rain zone Fig 2 3 Attenuation for 11 GHz polarization H V Specific attenuation dB km Specific attenuation for 24 GHz 25 15 aH 10 av il candi B D A B CDE FGH IK L MNP Q Rain zone Fig 2 5 Attenuation for 24 GHz polarization H V Fig 2 2 shows that rain attenuation is greater for horizontal polarization In regions with higher precip itation the difference in attenuation is more marked The microwave links RAy17 and RAy24 use both polarizations hence the need to consider the worse of the two i e horizontal polarization When ACM RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 15 Implementation Notes is active we recommend using horizontal polarization in the direction with lower data traffic typically up link 2 1 5 Multipath fading Multipath fading is another dominant fading mechanism A reflected wave causes a phenomenon known as multipath meaning that the radio signal can travel multiple paths to reach the receiver Typically multipath occurs when a reflected wave reaches the receiver at the same time in opposite phase as the direct wave that travels in a straight line from the transmitter Multipath propagation gives rise to two kinds of signal degrading effects i e flat fading and frequency selective fading Flat fading is a reduction in input signal level where all frequencies in the channel of inte
152. b band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 28 MHz ITU R F 387 Annex 5 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 201 Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 40 MHz ITU ITU R F 387 rec 1 1 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 1 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 40 MHz CEPT CEPT 12 06 Annex A 1 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 56 MHz CEPT 12 06 Annex C A sub band Freq table rcinfo11_A_530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_530
153. bidden frequency A parameter that caused the loss of the connection is restored after 1 minute Rollback Reading parameters of local unit cli cnf show Reading radio parameters of peer unit cli cnf show t p grep RADIO Entering parameters TX power of local unit cli cnf set RADIO TX PWR 3 Items of command RADIO TX PWR are taken from the list cli cnf show 166 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Command Line Interface Entering more parameters in both units cli cnf set t b RADIO TX CHAN 17128000 PEER RADIO RX CHAN 17128000 Put parameters containing spaces in quotation marks cli time set t b T 2012 11 27 10 55 00 Set time in both units 8 2 1 SSH keys Generation using ssh keygen user8laptop ssh keygen t dsa f usr ssh key Uses working directory to save private usr ssh key and public part ofthe key usx ssh key pub Copying the key into the RAy2 unit user laptop scp usr ssh key pub admin 192 168 141 202 tmp The public part of the key is written to the folder tmp Installation of key in RAy2 unit CLI admin rrusrhomes admin cli user authkey c a k tmp usr ssh key pub Testing access to RAy2 unit using SSH key user laptop ssh i usr ssh key admin 192 168 141 202 8 2 2 Scripts Script example with access using key user laptop ssh i usr ssh key admin 192 168 141 202 source etc profile cli
154. bled status RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 129 Configuration Egress block Egress Flooding mode The DA of every unicast and multicast frame is searched in SA filtering Learn limit LearnLimit the ATU If the DA is found in the address database it is considered known If it is not found it is considered unknown Frames with known DA s are not affected by this re gister Frames with unknown DA s generally flood out all the ports except the port they ori ginally came in on This register can be used to prevent frames with unknown DA s from egressing this port as follows unknown Do not egress any frame with an unknown DA unicast or multicast unknown Do not egress any frame with an unknown multicast DA multicast unknown Do not egress any frame with an unknown unicast DA unicast none Egress all frames with an unknown DA unicast and multicast Source Address Filtering method disabled No frame will be filtered i e discarded as a result of the contents of its Source Address field drop Ingressing frames will be discarded if their SA field is not in the ATU s on lock address database i e it s a new or unknown Source Address or if this port s bit is not set in the PortVec bits for the frames SA i e this port is not the source port for that MAC address Used for MAC based 802 1X drop Ingressing frames will be discarded if their SA field is in the ATU s on unlock address database as a Static e
155. brary Lesser General Public License LGPL and or further author licences declarations of responsibility exclusion and notifications Exact terms of GPL LGPL and some further licences are mentioned in the source code packets typically the files COPYING or LICENSE You can obtain ap plicable machine readable copies of source code of this software under GPL or LGPL licences on ht tp www racom eu This product also includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 240 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Safety environment licensing 11 5 Warranty RACOM supplied parts or equipment equipment are covered under warranty for inherently faulty parts and workmanship for a warranty period as stated in the delivery documentation from the date of dispatch to the customer The warranty does not cover custom modifications to software During the warranty period RACOM shall on its option fit repair or replace service faulty equipment always provided that malfunction has occurred during normal use not due to improper use whether deliberate or accidental such as attempted repair or modification by any unauthorised person nor due to the action of abnormal or extreme environmental conditions such as overvoltage liquid immersion or lightning strike Any equipment subject to repair under warranty must be returned by prepaid freight to RACOM direct The serviced equipment shall be ret
156. channels at peer unit are set auto matically NOTE Non standard duplex setting leads to non effective use of the spectrum Information about duplex spacing of TX and RX channel Enable automatic control of modulation Modulation level for TX channel You can select in range from QPSK high sensitivity for difficult conditions to 256QAM high speed under appropriate conditions With ACM enabled the modulation will automatically operate from QPSK to the selected modulation Enable automatic control of RF power Power is regulated towards lower level while maintaining signal level high enough not to affect current degree of modulation The ATPC algorithm controles the output power according to RSS of the peer unit The lowest allowed RSS the threshold is approx 10 dBm above declared sensitivity for BER 10 If necessary it is possible to use this parameter to move the threshold slightly up or down RF output power With ATPC enabled this parameter defines maximum RF power level Valid only for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links Gain of used antenna It is used to calculate approximate EIRP Valid only for RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links Approximate calculation of EIRP Number on the right shows the allowed EIRP limit Sign between numbers gives information on compliance noncompliance with allowed EIRP limits RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 71 Configuration 7 4 3 Service access Services Access routes for link conf
157. cinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 2 196 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz ANOaARWDH Bandwidth 56 MHz CEPT 12 06 Annex C A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 490 MHz Bandwidth 56 CS 80 MHz CEPT 12 06 Annex C A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 490 default 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 490 default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 197 Technical parameters 10 4 4 Nominal frequencies duplex 530 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Raven ree Avene xe Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz Bandwidth 1 75 MHz Channel arrangements based on 28 MHz channels A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 530 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11 B 530 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz
158. class 4 1 Mechanical design FOD Full Outdoor Security configuration via https ssh Dimensions 244 x 244 x 157 mm EMC EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 4 V2 1 1 Electrical safety EN 60 950 1 2006 ver 1 3 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 173 Technical parameters 10 1 2 Link speed Nominal link speed RAy2 xx User data rate Mbps 1 75 3 5 7 14 20 28 30 40 50 56 56 Modula MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz TO tion ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACAP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP QPSK 2 5 4 9 8 5 19 9 22 8 36 8 38 3 50 1 66 3 72 9 85 8 16 QAM 4 9 9 6 17 2 38 8 50 2 80 9 84 1 110 0 145 6 160 2 169 9 32 QAM 6 3 12 1 22 1 49 1 63 5 102 4 106 4 139 2 184 2 202 7 206 2 64 QAM 7 4 14 3 29 7 62 3 80 5 129 8 135 0 176 5 233 6 256 9 268 1 128 QAM 8 9 17 2 34 7 73 6 96 4 155 5 161 7 211 4 276 1 303 7 309 0 256 QAM 19 7 40 7 81 2 110 4 170 7 185 2 232 1 320 6 337 7 358 9 Link speed according to RFC 2544 ver 2 7 minimum RAy2 xx Link speed Mbps for frames 64 1518 B maximum Values Modulation 11 75 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 MHz 14 MHz 28 30 MHz 40 MHz 56 MHz 56 MHzTO I CS ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACCP ACAP ACCP AC
159. contain this port s Ether Type as its Ether Type The PRI bits will be the Frame Priority FPri assigned to the frame during ingress The VID bits will be the source port s Default VID bits if the source port was in Normal Network mode or the VID assigned to the frame during ingress if the source port was in Provider mode Valid only for the p5 CPU port type DSA Ether Type DSA mode uses standard Marvell DSA Tagged frame in formation following a user definable Ether Type see Ether type para meter This mode allows the mixture of Normal Network frames with DSA Tagged frames and is useful on ports that connect to a CPU Frames that ingress this port with an Ether Type that matches the port s Ether Type will be considered DSA Tagged and processed accordingly The frame s Ether Type and DSA pad bytes will be removed so the resulting frame will be ready to egress out Marvell DSA Tag Mode ports unmodified Frames that ingress this port with a different Ether Type will be considered Normal Network Frames and processed accordingly Marvell DSA Tag control frames that egress this port will always get the port s Ether Type inserted followed by two pad bytes of 0x00 before the DSA Tag Marvell DSA Tag Forward frames that egress this port can egress just like the control frames with the added Ether Type and pad or they can egress as if the port was configured in Normal Network mode This selection is controlled by the port s Egress Mode bit
160. cted via USB port Ethernet adapter enable USB to Ethernet adapter operation Enable Disable Ethernet adapter DHCP DHCP server for the client s connected via the USB to Ethernet adapter enable WiFi adapter enable USB to WiFi adapter operation Enable Disable WiFi adapter DHCP DHCP server for the client s connected via the USB to WiFi adapter enable WiFi SSID Service WiFi SSID can be max 32 characters long WiFi encryption Service WiFi encryption is WPA2 WiFi passphrase Service WiFi passphrase has to be 8 64 characters long The WiFi will not start until it is defined WiFi mode Service WiFi mode can be IEEE 802 11n or IEEE 802 11g WiFi channel IEEE 802 11n channels 1 9 IEEE 802 11g channels 1 13 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 75 Configuration Users List and setup of users Example menu of the c i super level user Status Local RAy2 17L 09 22 Link settings Services USB accessories Users General Radio Local Username Group Password SSHkey Edit N Service access admin cli super Set None Edit Delete Alarms Switch settings Peer 9 Username Group Password SSH key Status admin cli_super Set None Interface Note Local user accounts can be backed up at Maintenance gt Backup Qos Advanced Add user Refresh Mirror users Tools Fig 7 11 Menu Link settings Service access Users Within the default Factory Settings one user is defined in the system This user has userna
161. d Up to 3 hours at one minute Up to 4 days at 15 minutes For longer intervals at one day Interval Resolution History 1 hour 3 hours 1 minute 7 days 6 hours 4 days 15 minutes 30 days 1 week 6 months 1 day 180 days More options Previous Move by one width of selected interval towards older values Next Move by one width of selected interval towards newer values Last Move to the newest values Primary Y axis Selecting one of the observed values Temperature Voltage RSS SNR BER Net bitrate Ethernet in throughput Ethernet out throughput TX power Secondary Selecting a second value Y axis None Temperature Voltage RSS SNR BER Net bitrate Ethernet in throughput Ethernet out throughput TX power Alarm Enables the display of alarms if there were any RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 155 Configuration Data Numerical view of all values Status Local Unit A 10 29 Peer Unit B 1 Link settings Thumbnails Viewer Data General Radio lt Previous Interval 1 day Next gt Last gt gt Service access Quantities Plotted O Local O Peer O All Alarms Switch settings 2015 04 01 16 27 42 33 0 00 45 80 0 00 Status 2015 04 01 16 42 4278 0 00 4571 0 00 2015 04 01 16 57 42 60 0 00 45 57 0 00 2015 04 01 17 12 4271 0 00 46 07 0 00 QoS 2015 04 01 17 27 42 16 0 00 46 18 0 00 PIER 2015 04 01 17 42 41 59 0 00 45 99 0 00 2015 04 01 17 57 40 97 0 00 45 57 0 00 Tools 2015 04 01 18 12 40 58
162. d the next incoming frame from this port that is assigned to this resource gets sent out to the mirror destination After sending a sample frame the token count within the rate resource is reset to zero and the bucket increments continue for each subsequent frame arrival The sampling mode is useful for limiting the number of Mirror frames sent to the mirror destination This parameter controls the flow control de assertion when EBS limit action is set to generate a flow control message There are two modes available empty Flow control gets de asserted only when the ingress rate resource has become empty CBS limit Flow control gets de asserted when the ingress rate resource has enough room to accept at least one frame of size specified by the CBS limit For example if the CBS limit is programmed to be 2k Bytes then the flow control will get de asserted if there is at least 2k Bytes worth of tokens available in the ingress rate resource Any given bucket can be programmed to be aggregate rate based or traffic type based Rate based ingress rate limit Limits all types of traffic on the ingress port Traffic type based ingress rate limit Limits a specific type of traffic on the ingress port This parameter controls whether an ingress frame must meet both Priority and Frame type requirements to be counted for ingress rate calculations or if meeting only one requirement is sufficient to be counted for ingress rate calculations for t
163. d up to 200 Mbps RAy2 SW 360 User data speed up to 360 Mbps RAy2 SW 200 360 User data speed upgrade from 200 to 360 Mbps RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 27 Accessories 4 Accessories 4 1 Overview RACOM PART NUMBER Antenna Jirous ANT JRMA 380 10 11R ANT JRMA 650 10 11R ANT JRMB 900 10 11R ANT JRMB 1200 10 11R ANT JRMB 400 17R ANT JRMB 680 17R ANT JRMB 900 17R ANT JRMB 1200 17R ANT JRMB 400 24R ANT JRMB 680 24R ANT JRMB 900 24R ANT JRMB 1200 24R Antenna mounting kit SET RAY10 ANW SET RAY10 ARK SET RAY17 ANW SET RAY17 ARK SET RAY24 ANW SET RAY24 ARK Short description Antenna parabolic 0 38 m 10 11GHz with holder 28 0 29 0 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 65 m 10 11GHz with holder 34 1 35 5 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 9 m 10 11GHz with holder 37 0 37 5 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 1 2 m 10 11GHz with holder 40 0 41 0 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 4 m 17 GHz with holder 34 8 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 68 m 17 GHz with holder 38 6 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 9 m 17 GHz with holder 41 0 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 1 2 m 17 GHz with holder 44 6 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 4 m 24 GHz with holder 36 8 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 68 m 24 GHz with holder 41 7 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 0 9 m 24 GHz with holder 44 0 dBi Class 2 Antenna parabolic 1 2 m 24 GHz with holder 46 6 dBi Class 2 Set mouting RAy10 11 Antenna Andrew 60 100 Set mouting RAy10 11 Antenna Arkivator 30 60 99
164. e Link 233 Technical parameters 10 7 5 Nominal frequencies 24 00 24 15 GHz RAy2 24 Bandwidth 3 5 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 140 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 18M150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24069 0 24072 5 24076 0 24006 0 24079 5 24009 5 24083 0 24013 0 24086 5 24016 5 24090 0 24020 0 24093 5 24023 5 24097 0 24027 0 24100 5 24030 5 24104 0 24034 0 24107 5 24037 5 24111 0 24041 0 24114 5 24044 5 24118 0 24048 0 24121 5 24051 5 24125 0 24055 0 24128 5 24058 5 24132 0 24062 0 24135 5 24065 5 24139 0 24069 0 24142 5 24072 5 24146 0 24076 0 24079 5 24083 0 Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz no more channels ver 1 0 234 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Bandwidth 7 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 15 GHz duplex spacing 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 136 5 MHz Freq table rcinfo24 I8M150 1 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24072 5 24006 0 24079 5 24013 0 24086 5 24020 0 24093 5 24027 0 24100 5 24034 0 24107 5 24041 0 24114 5 24048 0 24121 5 24055 0 24128 5 24062 0 24135 5 24069 0 24142 5 24076 0 Ch No Lower MHz Ch No
165. e adapter settings e SS Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center y Control Panel Home Search Con View your basic network information and set up connections Manage wireless networks A T 9 See full map Change adapter setting ange adapter settings RKING PC racom Internet Change advanced sharing This computer OS View your active networks Connect or disconnect n the Network Connections window right click on Local area connection and then left click on Properties Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this connection gt z Hi Bluetooth Network Connection Local Area Connection Local Area Connection 2 Not connected Network cable unplugged Network cable unplugged x Bluetooth Device Personal Area MK Realtek RTL8168D 8111D FamilyP 3 AT TAP Windows Adapter V Local Area Connection Properties X Networking Sharing Connect using Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties 9 x amp Y Realtek RTL8168D 8111D Family PCI E Gigabit Ethemet gt General Configure You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports This connection uses the following items this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings v M Client for Microsoft Networks il Sacs Packet Scheduler gt Obtain an IP add
166. e data Force upgrade History Firmware upgrade grade Logs Programs Help Refresh Fig 7 45 Menu Tools Firmware If a new firmware version is released for the given microwave link type you can upload it to your RAy units Info Firmware Information about the current firmware package version on Local and Peer unit version Radio firmware Information about the radio board current firmware version on Local and Peer unit version Radio configura Radio board calibration data format version tion version Hardware Information about the HW version of the modem board version Radio hardware Information about the HW version of the radio board version Firmware upgrade 146 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Firmware upload Open file upload opens a dialog for uploading firmware package to the unit buffer Only after firmware has been prepared in the buffer can you perform the actual upgrade NOTE Use the file as it is do not unpack File name Name of the uploaded firmware file File size B Size of the uploaded firmware file Version in buffer Information about firmware version prepared in the buffer for installation into the unit Local Peer This firmware must first be prepared in the Firmware upload section see above Clean buffer You can use the Clean buffer button to delete prepared firmware package in the buffer Force upgrade Force mode blocks all safety and compatibility checks
167. e of obstacles RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 17 Implementation Notes D total link distance km f frequency GHz Tab 2 3 60 of the 1st Fresnel zone Length of link D Radius of zone r for frequency 11 GHz 17 GHz 24 GHz 0 5 km 1 10 m 0 89 m 0 75 m 1 km 1 56 m 1 25 m 1 06 m 2 km 2 21m 1 77 m 1 50m 4 km 3 13 m 2 50 m 2 12m 6 km 3 84 m 3 07 m 2 60m 8 km 4 43m 3 54 m 3 00 m 10 km 4 95 m 3 96 m 3 35 m 15 km 6 06 m 4 85 m 4 10 m 20 km 7 00m 5 60m 4 74 m 50 km 11 07 m 2 2 Example of microwave link design 1 2 3 4 5 V po et niku a Kalkulace spoje vlivem de t a V sledek Fig 2 7 Design flowchart Volba vys lac ho v konu ant n V po et tlumu p i en prostorem vicecestnym en m Step 1 Requirements Determination Link parameters Link distance 4 km First antenna height above sea level 295 m Second antenna height above sea level 320 m Location Central Europe rain zone H refraction gradient dN1 300 Transmission requirements Required data rate gt 160 Mbps Required availability 99 99 RAy parameters 17 GHz 161 Mbps gt Modulation 16QAM BW 56 MHz Ps BER 10 79 dBm Tx power 5 dBm max Tx power Antenna gain 18 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Implementation Notes 30cm 32 2 dBi 60cm 37 8 dBi 99cm 42 dBi Step 2 Free space loss calculation FSL
168. e performed Only the first Provider Tag found on the frame will be extracted and removed lts extracted data will be used for switching When this parameter is disabled and a port is configured as a Provider Port recursive Provider Tag stripping will be performed The first Provider Tag s data will be extracted and used for switching and then all subsequent Provider Tags found in the frame will also be removed This will only occur if the port s Ether type is not 0x8100 recursive Provider Tag removal cannot be performedSetup of VLAN related when the Provider s Ether Type is equal to 0x8100 Disabled ARP frames must contain a Broadcast Destination address to be able to access the CPU port Enabled ARP frames only need an Ether type equal to 0x0806 and the frames Destination Address can be any value to be able to access the CPU port This supports Mirroring ARP replies that are destined to a uni cast address Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Egress mode This parameter determines the make up of frames when they egress this port The Egress mode
169. ed The Secured mode set up process consists of a few steps Unique authorization keys generation cli link key gen t b Authorization keys exchange between the two communication units cli link key swap Authorization keys activation cli link key apply t b Parameter t determines whether we configure the whole link t b or only one unit t 1 Secured mode activation Both sides of the link must have identically secured mode set On or Off cli cnf set t b SVC SECURE PEER MODE on PEER SVC SECURE PEER MODE on Secured mode de activation cli cnf set t b SVC SECURE PEER MODE off PEER SVC SECURE PEER MODE off Backup of the keys to an external medium The backup has to be performed to be able to make service exchange of the corrupted unit if necessary The new exchanged unit is not able to make an active connection with the other unit if it is not loaded with the proper authorization key cli link key save s s f file The key is backed up to a selected file in the internal unit file system It can be transferred to an external medium using for example the scp client Authorization key restoration from the external medium The key has to be transferred to the unit internal file system first The scp client can be used The CLI commands can be applied subsequently
170. ed limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 99 85 8 84 10 0 13 23 11 19 24 10 26 4 16 QAM 198 169 9 77 16 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 247 5 206 2 73 19 0 25133 23129 14 5 15 9 64 QAM 297 268 1 69 22 5 29 35 26 32 9 5 11 8 128 QAM 346 5 309 0 66 25 5 32 35 29132 81 5 10 8 256 QAM 396 358 9 63 27 5 35 35 32 32 7 1 5 8 8 ver 1 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 219 Technical parameters 10 7 3 Nominal frequencies 24 00 24 25 GHz RAy2 24 Bandwidth 3 5 MHz TX channel nominal frequencies Band 24 00 24 25 GHz duplex spacing 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 238 MHz Freq table rcinfo24_ISM250_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 24069 0 24072 5 24076 0 24006 0 24079 5 24009 5 24083 0 24013 0 24086 5 24016 5 24090 0 24020 0 24093 5 24023 5 24097 0 24027 0 24100 5 24030 5 24104 0 24034 0 24107 5 24037 5 24111 0 24041 0 24114 5 24044 5 24118 0 24048 0 24121 5 24051 5 24125 0 24055 0 24128 5 24058 5 24132 0 24062 0 24135 5 24065 5 24139 0 24069 0 24142 5 24072 5 24146 0 24076 0 24149 5 24079 5 24153 0 24083 0 24156 5 24086 5 24160 0 24090 0 24163 5 24093 5 24167 0 24097 0 24170 5 24100 5 24174 0 24104 0 24177 5 24107 5 24181 0 24111 0 24184 5 24114 5 24188 0 24118 0 24191 5
171. ed menu diagram Frame VLAN VTU STU ATU Trunk DA SA DA SA id QPri QoS DSCP by port by VLAN DA SA VID VID def VID id SID SID id FID by port by VLAN id Trunk ATU Trunk Jid port egress by port RSTP ATU Port Trunk tag egress Egress mode Member tag 114 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration An indicative description of the function of each block Frame An incoming frame contains the destination MAC address DA and the source address SA The VLAN 802 1p priority can be contained in the Ethernet header and the DSCP priority in the IP header If the frame is a member of a VLAN it carries it s VID number and 802 1q priority in the tag VLAN A frame is received through ports Eth1 Eth2 Air or from microwave CPU The head of the frame may change at this time based on parameters set in the VLAN menu All untagged frames are assigned a VID A tagged VLAN framework can have its own VID overwritten by a default VID The packet priority can be ovewritten according to parameter menus QoS VLAN and ATU The FID for searching in the ATU table is allocated to the frame within the VLAN menu by the input port or from the corresponding VID in the VTU table Member parameter can limit the allowed output direction of ports Frames sent from a unit transfers through an output port The Egress mode parameter bound to the port either adds or removes the VLAN tag VTU
172. ed on 7 MHz duplex range 57 75 285 25 MHz A sub band Freq table rcinfo1O A default 6 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10301 875 10303 625 10305 375 10307 125 10308 875 10476 875 10364 875 10532 875 10310 625 10478 625 10366 625 10534 625 10312 375 10480 375 10368 375 10536 375 10314 125 10482 125 10370 125 10538 125 10315 875 10483 875 10371 875 10539 875 10317 625 10485 625 10373 625 10541 625 10319 375 10487 375 10375 375 10543 375 10321 125 10489 125 10377 125 10545 125 10322 875 10490 875 10378 875 10546 875 10324 625 10492 625 10380 625 10548 625 10326 375 10494 375 10382 375 10550 375 10328 125 10496 125 10384 125 10552 125 10329 875 10497 875 10385 875 10553 875 10331 625 10499 625 10387 625 10555 625 10333 375 10501 375 10389 375 10557 375 10335 125 10503 125 10391 125 10559 125 10336 875 10504 875 10392 875 10560 875 10338 625 10506 625 10394 625 10562 625 10340 375 10508 375 10396 375 10564 375 10342 125 10510 125 10398 125 10566 125 10343 875 10511 875 10399 875 10567 875 10345 625 10513 625 10401 625 10569 625 10347 375 10515 375 10403 375 10571 375 10349 125 10517 125 10405 125 10573 125 10350 875 10518 875 10406 875 10574 875 10352 625 10520 625 10408 625 10576 625 10354 375 10522 375 10410 375 10578 375 10356 125 10524 125 10412 125 10580 125 10357 875 10525 875 10413 875 10581 875 10359 625 10527 625 10415 625 10583 625 10361 375 10529 375 10417 375 10585 375 10363 125 1053
173. en the bolts with a No 6 Allen key Fig 6 16 Dish before installing the FOD unit Fig 6 17 Tightening bolts on the FOD unit RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 47 Installation f The precise horizontal direction the antenna is pointing in can be adjusted using the bolt with two nuts part No 10 and 12 Once the direction has been set the antenna is fixed in place by tightening the nuts against the bracket to prevent further movement of the antenna The vertical direction the antenna is pointing in can be adjusted by turning the fine adjustment bolt part No 9 by the bracket mounting plate After selecting the correct direction the position is secured by tightening the bolt see point d part No 7 and 8 The correct position in both directions is found by monit oring RSS voltage see Section 6 5 2 Directing antennas y Fig 6 18 Horizontal adjustment of the Fig 6 19 Vertical adjustment of the antenna direction antenna direction g After pointing the antenna in the right direction tighten the bolts on the bracket on the axes of rotation part No 6 and 11 Then check again that all other bolts have been sufficiently tightened We can now proceed to connect the FOD unit to the user network Fig 6 20 Tightening the axis at the fine Fig 6 21 Tightening the axis at the bracket adjustment bolt 48 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Installation 6 2 3 Lubrication and preservation of
174. eneral Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface Qos gt Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Local RAy2 17L 10 22 VLAN STU ATU table o0 0000059 c Oo 0000000000905 00 02 a9 60 8 00 02 a9 9c 2 00 0c 42 2ef 00 11 3b 14 5 00 13 3b 1577 00 18 6e 3e 7 00 21 70 93 d 00 26 b9 d5 8 14 fe b5 9e bf 38 63 bb 07 3 44 31 92 76 3 5c 26 0a 17 5 5c f9 dd 52 ftc7 b8 2a 72 c4 b b8 ca 3a ca 2 d4 be d9 0b 0 d4 be d9 0f 6 ecf4 bb 10 5 f0 1f af 2d 2F 8c VTU local ATU settings static dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic Prior Destination t off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off ATU Link Ok port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association port association Monitoring Policy Peer RAy2 17U RSTP Port association Trunk i p5 CPU p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air p6 Ai
175. eno Ray2 Fig 3 5 Grounding options HW button Fig 3 6 Power supply connector 1 Fig 3 7 Power supply connector 2 24 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Product 3 4 Status LEDs Fig 3 8 Status LEDs Tab 3 1 Meaning of LED status indicators Diode Colour Function AIR Green Permanently lit AIR link OK Red Permanently lit AIR LOSS loss of connectivity Permanently lit system OK Permanently lit together with SYS Red unit is starting Green Flashing regularly HW button pushed on the unit running factory defaults in progress SYS Firmware writing in progress DO NOT POWER OFF Permanently lit together with SYS Green unit is starting Red serious system error Flashing regularly HW button just pressed Flashing intermittently unit in the service Linux ETH1 port Green Flashing regularly Auto Negotiation in progress Flashing irregularly Link Activity 10 100 1000 Permanently lit Link 10 100 1000 ETH ETH2 port Grande Flashing regularly Auto Negotiation in progress 9 Flashing irregularly Link Activity 10 100 1000 Permanently lit Link 10 100 1000 Flashing regularly Flashing irregularly 500 ms on 500 ms off Flashing intermittently 50 ms on 950 ms off by passing frames 3 5 Technical parameters Basic technical parameters are stated in chapter Technical parameters RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 25 Product 3 6 Di
176. entation Notes 2 Implementation Notes 2 1 Link calculation Before a microwave link can be installed an analysis and calculation of the microwave link must be made first The analysis should take place before the site survey itself to get a clear idea about the di mensions of the antennas The analysis consists of the following steps Free space loss calculation Link budget calculation Rain attenuation Multipath fading Fade margin Fresnel zones calculation This chapter explains the individual steps and an example of link design is given at the end 1 NOTE For quick reference you can use the calculator on www racom eu 2 1 1 Free space loss calculation As the electromagnetic waves travel through open space they are attenuated This attenuation is de scribed as Free space Loss The loss depends on the distance travelled by signal and its frequency Longer distance and higher frequency both mean greater attenuation Free space loss can be calculated thus FSL 32 44 20log f 20log D Where FSL free space loss dB f frequency of the emitted signal MHz D length of the link km 2 1 2 Link budget calculation The goal is to design a link producing a received signal stronger than the receiver s sensitivity at the required BER typically 10 Since every radio signal in earth atmosphere is subject to fading some difference between received signal level under normal circumstances and receiver se
177. er 2x1 5 mm 40 to 60 C ProPS Datasheet DC surge protection OTH DP 024 orig part no DC 24V LPZ1 LPZ2 IP20 40 85 C Saltek Datasheet 14 http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07 prislusenstvi CAB FIB OFA pdf 15 http www racom cz download hw ray free eng 07 prislusenstvi CAB HYB OFA pdf 1 https webservice new racom eu main eshop detail i 193 http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07 prislusenstvi OTH DP 024 pdf 34 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Accessories RAy grounding kit KIT GROUDING 1 4 e Grounding kit for Cat 7 S FTP 4x 2x23 AWG cable Pewtronic Detail see Grounding Datasheet KIT GROUDING RAY e RAy grounding set for grounding RAy equipment to the mast Contains a ZSA16 grounding terminal grounding tape and a cable with grounding lugs Detail see Grounding Datasheet Access adapters OTH W1 WIFI 9 Wifi adapter for service access to the web interface via USB connector RAy2 provides a built in DHCP server with up to 6 leases To access the RAy2 always use the fixed IP 169 254 169 168 Lower Unit or 169 254 170 168 Upper Unit SET X5 ETH USB Ethernet adapter for service access to the web interface via USB connector RAy2 provides a built in DHCP server with up to 6 leases To access the RAy2 always use the fixed IP 169 254 169 168 Lower Unit or 169 254 170 168 Upper Unit Extended descriptions 20 See
178. er MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz L8 24030 5 U32 24114 5 L9 24034 0 U33 24118 0 ver 1 0 All technical parameters within this User manual are subject to change without prior notification 238 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Safety environment licensing 11 Safety environment licensing 11 1 Frequency RAy2 microwave links designed for operation in licensed bands must be used in accordance with license issued by the Telecommunications Authority for the area the device is operating in RAy2 microwave links must comply with the maximum permitted radiated power EIRP in accordance with conditions of the given country 11 2 ROHS and WEEE compliance The RAy2 is fully compliant with the European Commission s RoHS Restriction of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment and WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment environmental directives Y RoHS Restriction of hazardous substances RoHS The RoHS Directive prohibits the sale in the European Union of electronic equipment containing these hazardous substances lead cadmium mercury hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls PBBs and polybrominated diphenyl ethers PBDEs End of life recycling programme WEEE The WEEE Directive is concerned with the recovery reuse and recycling of electronic and electrical equipment Under the Directive used equipment must be marked collected separatel
179. er Management Command Prompt Command Prompt Admin Ga Task Manager Control Panel File Explorer Search Run Shut down or sign out Desktop Po o Continue to the Network Connections page m Using Start Button o Start button Left click choose Control Panel and Network and Sharing Center Mail Language NM Control Panel gt se 2 i Location Settings gt Defragment and Optimise Drives Devices and Printers ED Mail 32 bit Y Microsoft Silverlight Default Programs P Mouse Network and Sharing Center Help and Support xe Microsoft Excel 2010 E Notification Area Icons gt All Programs By NVIDIA Control Panel a Personalisation E Phone and Modem 3 Power Options l Programs and Features Search programs and files o Select Change adapter settings in the Network and Sharing Center ES Network and Sharing Center T us Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center File Edit View Tools Help View your basic network information and set up connections Control Panel Home View your active networks Change adapter settings Change advanced sharing Nezn m s Access type No Internet access settings Public network Connections Sit Ethernet o Continue to the Network Connections page m From Task Bar RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 253 IP address in the PC Windows 8 Oo Click the icon for In
180. ers as they are stored in backup configuration in the buffer To use any of these values you must use the Apply button Show backup Clicking the button displays the values of individual parameters held in the backup file Backup Settings Open file upload To use any of these values you must use the Apply button For loading the backup configuration see menu Tools Maintenance Backup Start Activating automatic refresh fields marked by icon using the Start button with the frequency cca 1 sec Stop Use the Stop button to stop automatic refresh of displayed information with 1sec period Date and time values are refreshed anyway Fig 7 1 Info Refresh Help The microwave link configuration system is equipped with built in Help see Help section The Help is accessible in two forms Configuration parameter context help The help text is displayed in the pop up window after clicking the parameter name The whole user interface help The help text is displayed within the configuration screen after clicking the Help menu Secure login You can login into the configuration interface using either the insecure http protocol default login screen or the secure https protocol You should select the connection method on the login screen If the https protocol is used it is not possible to tap the network communication and acquire the station s login information 62 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o C
181. erved multicast priority Fi Switch settings Reserved multicast Status DA ioter tine x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 a b c 01 80 c2 00 00 0x QoS 01 80 c2 00 00 2x Advanced Tools Ports settings Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Maintenance Learning Live data Hold at 1 O O O O History ATU refresh unlocked v unlocked v unlocked v unlock Logs DA mapping Programs Egress block none v none v none A none Help SA filtering disabled v disabled v disabled disable Learn limit 0 0 0 0 SA priority pel or none none v none v none DA priority pie ac none v none none v none Port association p2 Eth1 O O O p4 Eth2 L1 LJ O p5 CPU O O O p6 Air O HO Ha Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 37 Menu Switch settings Advanced ATU settings Setup of ATU Address Translation Unit table related parameters Aging ATU age time This value determines the time that each ATU Entry remains valid in timeout s the database since its last access as a source address before being purged The default value is 330 seconds The minimum age time is 15 seconds The maximum age time is 3825 seconds almost 64 minutes If the Age Time is set to 0 the Aging function is disabled and all learned addresses will remain in the database forever 128 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Reserved When this parameter is enabled frames with a Destination Address in the range multicast 01 80 C2 00 00 0x or 01 80 C2 00 00 2x
182. esigned in accordance with regulation CSN EN 62305 1 Where possible the antenna should be located in an LPZ OB protection zone with the use of a local or artificial air termination device for protection against direct lightning strikes 2 When meeting conditions for ensuring electrical insulation distance from the lightning conductor in accordance with article 6 3 it is not recommended to ground the load bearing structure and antenna to the external air termination network Grounding should be attached to the protective system of the internal LV wiring or grounded internal structures using a CYA 6 mm bonding con ductor see Fig 6 28 Grounding installation 1 52 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Installation n mm Fig 6 28 Grounding installation 1 P Fig 6 29 Grounding installation 2 x LIGHTNING ARRESTER ae LIGHTNING ARRESTER GROUNDING KIT RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 53 Installation If itis not possible to set up conditions of electrical insulation in accordance with article 6 3 we re commend connecting the load bearing structure at roof level to the external air termination network via an 8mm diameter FeZn conductor and shielding the data cable before entry to the building with a grounding kit and CYA 6 mm conductor to the bonding bus and if not already set up
183. ess this port This parameter takes effect only if the 802 1q mode parameter see menu Ad vanced VLAN is set to secure mode Add a new VTU database entry Press the Edit button to open the configuration dialog of selected VTU database record NOTE Should the Primary key value be modified the other record identified by the entered Primary key is added if it doesn t exist yet or modified if it exists already Delete the selected VTU database record Delete the whole VTU database 126 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Status Local RAy2 17L 09 08 Link Ok Peer RAy2 1 Link settings oa VLAN STU vTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Radio Add VTU entry VID l2 Service access Label abc Alarms FID 0 Switch settings ow Use VID priority v VID priority 6 QoS VID policy Advanced Member tag Tools p2 Eth1 egress unmodified v Maintenance p4 Eth2 egress unmodified v Live data p5 CPU egress unmodified v History p6 Air egress unmodified v Logs Programs Help Apply Cancel Fig 7 36 Menu Switch settings Advanced VTU edit RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 127 Configuration ATU settings Status Local RAy2 17L 10 49 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17 Link settings Ic E VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP T Radio Global Aging timeout s 330 Service access Reserved multicast to CPU e Res
184. eter to the connectors and observe RSS changes in 2 V DC range A stronger signal corresponds to lower voltage Alternate units on both sides and slowly adjust the antenna vertically and horizontally to find the position with the strongest reception At the same time look for the main signal maximums To differentiate between the main and the side maximums refer to the Main and side lobes paragraph RSS measurement For correctly setting the bridge and positioning it in the right direction it is advisable to connect a PC and use the diagnostic capabilities of the RAy2 station In uncomplicated cases it is enough to connect a voltmeter via connectors and adjust to the lowest indicated voltage Voltage is calibrated according to signal strength E g RSS 65 dBm corresponds to voltage 0 65 V RSS 80 dBm corresponds to voltage 0 80 V etc Fig 6 39 RSS connectors Fig 6 38 RSS connectors connecting a voltmeter RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 57 Installation Main and side lobes Directional antennas have a specific angle within which radio waves can be transmitted or received Angle of Tx Rx The strongest signal is emitted in a forward direction the main lobe is a graphical representation of its direction of travel and strength However signals are also emitted and received from unwanted directions through side lobes In receiving antennas this is a highly significant factor contributing to the level of interference i
185. ex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 20 MHz B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 1 0 RAy2 10 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 15 10 65 GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 28 MHz CEPT ERC REC 12 05 E B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz ver 2 0 186 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 10 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 15 10 65 GHz duplex spacing 350 MHz Bandwidth 56 MHz CEPT ERC REC 12 05 E B sub band Freq table rcinfo10_B_default 5 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Lower MHz Upper MHz 10238 10588 10266 10616 ver 2 0 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 187 Technical parameters 10 4 RAy2 11 A B parameters 10 4 1 Upper Lower Limits RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX power Min Max Modulation dBm dBm QPSK 15 24 16 QAM 15 22 32 QAM 15 22 64 QAM 15 21 128 QAM 15 20 256 QAM 15 19 ver 2 2 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Duplex spacing Sub band MHz A 490 530 B 490 530 ver 2 5 RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB Sub band Range Sub band Unit L Unit U MHz MHz R min 10 695 11 185 max 10 970 11 460 B min 10 935 11 425 max 11 195 11 695 ver 1 0 18
186. figuration Adjust time Manual time setup Use the dialog box to manually set the current date and time You can copy time from browser local PC Adjust time Date yyyy MM dd 2014 02 10 Time hh mm ss 08 02 59 Copy browser time Apply Cancel NTP source IP IP address of the time synchronization server NTP period Time synchronization interval Time zone Time zone Daylight saving Enable daylight saving time Note When the time zone and or daylight saving time is changed the original values set in the RAy unit are kept The actual change takes place after OS restart in order to prevent unex pected states related with local time change 7 4 2 Radio Setup of general parameters of the radio link Status Local Unit A 07 00 Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Link settings General gt Radio f Local Peer Radio type L U Service access Polarization vertical horizontal Alarms Bandwidth MHz 7 MHz Switch settings Frequency input list v Status TX channel GHz L1 17 105000 v RX channel GHz U22 17 178500 v Interface Duplex spacing MHz 73 500 Qos ACM Advanced TX modulation QAM64 v QAM32 Y Tools ATPC Maintenance ATPC RSS threshold dBm 71 0 vw 71 75 0 vw 75 Live data TX power dBm 22 v 20 v History Antenna gain dBi 0 00 0 00 EIRP limit dBm 22 00 lt 20 00 20 00 lt 20 00 Logs Programs Help A pply Cancel Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 8 Menu Link settings Radio 70 R
187. formula and refractivity data ITU R P 530 14 Propagation data and prediction methods required for the design of terrestrial line of sight systems ITU R P 837 1 and 6 Characteristics of precipitation for propagation modelling ITU R P 838 3 Specific attenuation model for rain for use in prediction methods ITU R P 310 ITU R P 526 ITU R P 676 ITU R P 834 ITU R P 835 20 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Product 3 Product RAy2 microwave links enable transmissions in both bands requiring license fees and those that are free They work as a point to point link in a full duplex setting with transfer speeds of up to 360 Mbps Bandwidth can be configured from 1 75 up to 56 MHz Modulation can be fixed or adaptive and can be adjusted from QPSK to 256QAM RAy2 microwave links can also be operated as a Short Range Device SRD Fig 3 1 RAy2 Microwave link The link is formed by two FOD Full Outdoor units In the case of links operating in the RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 bands both units have identical hardware In the case of links operating in licensed bands one unit labeled L is transmitting in the Lower and receiving in the Upper part of the band The other unit labeled U is operating vice versa RAy2 links require the use of external parabolic antennas Parabolic antennas from different producers are available Cross polarization valid only for links operating in the RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 bands One
188. from the tool Tools Live data Frequency analyser In the case of links operating on a licensed band setup the parameters based on the assigned license Bandwidth Channel Selection TX RX channel e Modulation TX modulation ACM is recommended When selecting fixed modulation it is necessary to account for the fade margin If fixed modulation is setup close to a possible maximum then a deterioration in RSS could endanger the link both for data transfer as well as service access Transmit power TX power or ATPC e Verify and record IP addresses Define access channels https telnet ssh ssh with password Check the users password settings Restart both units by interrupting their power supply and verify the status of the link This verifies that all parameters have been stored correctly in the memory Select Tools Maintenance Backup Settings Local amp Peer Download and save the configuration to backup file cnf_backup tgz This completes the installation Further configuration can be performed remotely RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 61 Configuration 7 Configuration 7 1 Introduction Controls The following configuration buttons are used for configuration Apply Apply and save parameters Cancel Set parameters are overwritten with original values Refresh Reload all current values of the unit both units Show defaults Show values of individual paramet
189. full duplex the Out collisions may occur Ethernet link speed and duplex mode can be selected Both parameters can be either auto negotiated or set manually When the Auto negotiation parameter is disabled only manual setting of the speed and duplex is possible In most cases itis better to enable the auto negotiation and use auto auto speed and duplex settings There are two possibilities to force the link to operate in specific speed and duplex Auto negotiation enabled Select the desired Speed duplex The auto negoti ation process advertises only this specified link mode The link partner is asked to use it Auto negotiation disabled Select the desired Speed duplex The link is set to this specified link mode The link partner has to be set manually to the same mode The flow control mechanism is handled by sending Pause frames to the connected device There are several modes of Pause frames generation nopause Pause frames disabled symmetric Pause frames transmission and reception enabled asymmetric Pause frames transmission enabled reception disabled send asymmetric Pause frames reception enabled transmission disabled receive Auto Negotiation has to be enabled to enable Pause frames sending and receiving If the Auto Negotiation is disabled and Flow control is required the Force flow control parameter can be used Flow control is turned on without having to be Auto Negotiated The 1000BASE T master s
190. g standards and or other normative documents Spectrum art 3 2 EN 300 440 1 V1 6 1 EMC art 3 1 b EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 3 V1 6 1 EN 301 489 4 V2 1 1 Safety art 3 1 a EN 60950 1 ed 2 2006 A1 2010 A2 2014 A11 2009 A12 2011 Cor 1 2012 Notified Body Opinion According to European Union Directive 1999 5 EC ANNEX IV Document No 0120 CC V0032 14 Issued by Cesky metrologicky institut Okruzni 31 Brno CR 13 of February 2015 Notified Body No 1383 C 1383 O The above named equipment is classified as a Class 2 radio equipment and it is marked with Equipment Class Identifier in accordance with Commission Decision 2000 299 EC Nove Mesto na Morave 5 of March 2015 Jiri Hruska CEO A pm VA ee 4 7 ym HS C y RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic www racom eu Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu Cc ver 1 3 Fig 11 4 Declaration of Conformity for RAy2 24 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 245 Safety environment licensing 11 7 Country of Origin Declaration EP RACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS Country of Origin Declaration S Producer RACOM s r o Address Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic VAT No CZ46343423 y S We the manufacturer hereby declare that Country of Origin of the RAy microwave links and its accessories is the Czech Repub
191. gs ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Radio STU table SIDS p2 Eth1 Z p4 Eth2 Z p5 CPU p6 Service access 1 all forwarding forwarding forwarding forn Alarms 2 second forwarding disabled disabled forn Switch settings Status Interface Qos gt Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Warning Deleting a STU entry removes also all VTU entries with given SID Add entry Edit Copy Delete Fig 7 33 Menu Switch settings Advanced STU The per VLAN Spanning Tree Unit STU in the device supports user commands to access and modify the contents of the Port State database Primary Key The Ed icon indicates which parameter field is taken as the unique identifier in the database This field entry ensures each record is unique and must not be duplicated SID VTU 802 1s MSTP Port State Information Database number This parameter indicates the SID number that is associated with the 802 1s Port state parameter It is essential to define the SID to be able to create records in the VTU VLAN Table Label A custom string label for a STU entry Port state This parameter is used to support 802 1s per VLAN spanning tree Port states bellow are valid for frames with a VID that is associated to this SID disabled Use non VLAN Port States i e the port s default Port State for this port blocking listening learning RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 123 Configuration forwa
192. gt ipconf ig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix racom cz IP Address 192 168 169 166 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Ch ecking the PC unit connection using Ping In Windows XP send a ping as follows Check the connection between the PC and the unit via the Ethernet cable In the Start menu click Run Enter command cmd Write ping 192 168 1 2 and press OK A message appears in a window C Documents and Settings demo gt ping 192 168 169 169 Pinging 192 168 169 169 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims Reply from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims Reply from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims Reply from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time lt ims If no communication takes place a message appears with the text Request timed out If communication between the web browser and the unit doesn t take place check the browser settings The Work offline item in the File menu must not be crossed out 250 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o IP address in the PC Windows 7 Appendix D IP address in the PC Windows 7 Setting up the IP address in the PC For configuration of the link a suitable IP address has to be set up in the PC for example 192 168 169 160 Open the Start menu Control Panel n new window choose Network and Internet Continue View network status and tasks n new window choose Chang
193. h No AONOARWN Lower MHz 10712 5 10719 5 10726 5 10733 5 10740 5 10747 5 10754 5 10761 5 10768 5 10775 5 10782 5 10789 5 10796 5 10803 5 10810 5 10817 5 10824 5 10831 5 10838 5 10845 5 10852 5 10859 5 10866 5 10873 5 10880 5 10887 5 10894 5 10901 5 10908 5 10915 5 10922 5 Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 11242 5 10943 5 11473 5 11249 5 10950 5 11480 5 11256 5 10957 5 11487 5 11263 5 10964 5 11494 5 11270 5 10971 5 11501 5 11277 5 10978 5 11508 5 11284 5 10985 5 11515 5 11291 5 10992 5 11522 5 11298 5 10999 5 11529 5 11305 5 11006 5 11536 5 11312 5 11013 5 11543 5 11319 5 11020 5 11550 5 11326 5 11027 5 11557 5 11333 5 11034 5 11564 5 11340 5 11041 5 11571 5 11347 5 11048 5 11578 5 11354 5 11055 5 11585 5 11361 5 11062 5 11592 5 11368 5 11069 5 11599 5 11375 5 11076 5 11606 5 11382 5 11083 5 11613 5 11389 5 11090 5 11620 5 11396 5 11097 5 11627 5 11403 5 11104 5 11634 5 11410 5 11111 5 11641 5 11417 5 11118 5 11648 5 11424 5 11125 5 11655 5 11431 5 11132 5 11662 5 11438 5 11139 5 11669 5 11445 5 11146 5 11676 5 11452 5 11153 5 11683 5 11160 5 11690 5 ver 2 2 200 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 11 xA RAy2 11 xB TX channel nominal frequencies Band 10 7 11 7 GHz duplex spacing 530 MHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bandwidth 14 MHz ITU R F 387 Annex 5 A sub band Freq table rcinfo11 A 530 13 B su
194. h1 getman p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Ingeress reserved queue size buffers 0 0 1 1 Egress total queue size buffers 0 0 0 0 Queue 0 buffers 0 0 0 0 Queue 1 buffers 0 0 0 0 Queue 2 buffers 0 0 0 0 Queue 3 buffers 0 0 0 0 Refresh Fig 7 19 Menu Switch settings Queue allocation Free queue Port name Ingress Egress Queue 0 3 buffers Free Queue Size Counter This counter reflects the current number of unallocated buffers available for all the ports buffers Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 This counter reflects the current number of reserved Ingress buffers assigned to this port buffers This counter reflects the current number of Egress buffers switched to this port This is the total number of buffers across all priority queues buffers Those counters reflect the current number of Egress buffers switched to this port for indi vidual priority queues buffer RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 89 Configuration Register dump Local Unit A 07 53 Link Ok Peer Unit B 07 5
195. hat are targeted toward an Egress Monitor Destination leave via the port se monitor lected by this parameter This includes frames transmitted on a port that is enabled destination to be the Egress monitor source Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 136 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Ingress monitor source Egress monitor source Mirror destination CPU destination Policy When this parameter is enabled any frame that ingresses this port is also sent to the Ingress monitor destination port The frame is sent to this port even if it is discarded due to switching policy but the frame will not be forwarded if it contains an error such as CRC etc or is filtered by ingress rate limiting When this parameter is enabled any frame that egresses this port will also be sent to the Egress monitor destination port The 802 1q mode and VTU entries on the Egress monitor destination port must be set to be the same as they are on the Egress monitor source port so the frames egress with the same tagged
196. he ingressing frame option 82 is an IPv4 UDP with a UDP Destination port 0x02230f 0x0222 UDP UDP Policy Mapping occurs when the ingressing frame is a Broadcast IPv4 UDP or a Multicast IPv6 UDP RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 137 Configuration RSTP Status Local RAy2 17L 11 02 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17 Link settings cas VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP T Radio Global RSTP enable Fj Bridge priority 32768 y Alarms Hello time s 2 Nj Switch settings Max age s 20 Status Forward delay s 15 Interface Algorithm normal Qos i Ports settings gt Advanced Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p6 Air Tools Port priority 128 v 128 hd 128 vi Maintenance Path cost 0 0 0 Live data Edge History MAC address 00 02 A9 60 8B 6B 00 02 A9 60 8B 6B 00 02 A9 60 8B 6B Logs Programs s Apply Cancel Refresh Show defaults elp Fig 7 41 Menu Switch settings Advanced RSTP The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a network protocol that ensures a loop free topology for any bridged Ethernet local area network The basic function of RSTP is to prevent bridge loops and the broadcast radiation that results from them Spanning Tree Protocol also allows network design to include spare redundant links to provide automatic backup paths if an active link fails without the danger of bridge loops or the need for manual enabling disabling of these backup links RSTP enable When RSTP is enabled the bridge i
197. his rate resource Any combinations of the four queue priorities can be selected Frames with marked priority are accounted for in this ingress rate resource If there is no priority selected priority of the frame doesn t have any affect on the ingress rate limiting calculations done for this ingress rate resource 106 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Frame type Any of the following frame types can be selected to be tracked as part of the rate resource calculations Management MGMT Multicasts Broadcasts Unicasts Address Resolution Pro tocol ARP TCP Data TCP Ctrl UDP Non TCPUDP covers IGMP ICMP GRE IGRP and L2TP IMS PolicyMirror PolicyTrap Unknown Unicasts or Unknown Multicasts More than one frame type can be selected for a given rate resource RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 107 Configuration Egress queue control See also Output queue diagram Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status gt Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Local RAy2 17L 10 59 Port Port advanced PIRL Egress queue Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Scheduling mode Speed J guard Count mode weighted RRB v weighted RRB v weighted RRB M strict layer 2 v layer 2 v layer 2 M layer Rate limit 0 kbps 0 kbps 0 kbps 4000 Frame overhead 0 v 0 v 0 v 0 B
198. ibited RACOM reserves the right to make changes to the technical specification in the product function to terminate production of this product or to terminate its service support without previous written notific ation of customers Conditions of use of this product software abide by the license mentioned below The program distributed by this license has been freed with the purpose to be useful but without any specific guarantee Under no circumstances is the author or another company or person responsible for secondary accidental or related damages resulting from application of this product The producer does not provide the user with any kind of guarantee providing assurances of suitability and usability for his application Products are not developed designed or tested for utilization in devices directly affecting the health or life functions of persons or animals nor as a part of another important device and does not provide guarantees if the product has been used in these aforementioned devices RACOM Open Software License Version 1 0 November 2009 Copyright c 2001 RACOM s r o M rov 1283 Nov M sto na Morav 592 31 Everyone can copy and spread word for word copies of this license but no changes are permitted The program binary version is freely available on http www racom eu This product contains open source or other software originating from third parties subject to GNU General Public License GPL GNU Li
199. icrowave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Feature keys Status Local RAy2 17L 07 10 Link Ok Link settings Backup Feature keys Firmware Radio adaptation Restart General Radio Local Note Feature keys changes take effect after restart Service access Feature Limit Enable Remove Alarms speed 50 Delete Switch settings speed 200 Delete Status Upload local feature keys Interface Note Feature keys changes take effect after restart Qos Upload Open file upload Advanced Tools Peer Feature Limit Enable gt Maintenance speed 170 Live data History Logs Refresh Fig 7 44 Menu Tools Feature keys The sub set of RAy parameters is affected by use of Feature keys The feature keys limiting data transfer speed Mbps are now available Speed of the transferred data is determined by a combination of the radio channel bandwidth parameter Bandwidth MHz and modulation order parameter TX modulation The Feature key limiting the data transfer speed enables only certain combinations of the channel bandwidth and modulation order to get the data transfer speed according to the Feature key The data transfer speed is typically slightly higher than declared When installed the Feature key is activated after the unit restart The unit can be restarted using the Tools Maintenance Restart Choose the Restart mode warm Feature Name of the function controlled by the Feature key Here are listed the
200. ign after preamble are considered to be help and are listed when the script is selected in the web interface Scripts should not be interactive as there is no possibility to send a response from the web interface All script options should be implemented as parameters Syntax should be valid for interpret shell ash from BusyBox v1 20 1 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 159 Configuration bin sh script checkes if service with the same name or vid already exists if not creates a new entry in VTU with given VID input parameters service nam name of the new service it VID vid of the new service return values 0 ok 3 bad parameter 5 service already exists 6 there already exists an entry with given VID 42 other error D42_NAME 1 D42 VID 2 D42N service data42 error echo D42N Error gt 42 info echo SD42N S gt amp 2 die error exit 42 error basic check if not empty if z D42 NAME then error Bad service name exit 3 fi if z D42 VID then error Bad service VID exit 3 fi D42 FOUND cli nw get vtu all grep D42 NAME if n D42 FOUND then error Service s with name D42 NAME found echo D42 FOUND exit 5 fi 160 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration D42 VALID cli nw get vtu D42 VID sed n s valid 1 p
201. ignated Bridge Designated Port Role RSTP BPDU rx 128 Forwarding admin Auto admin Auto admin Y Uptime 619456 oper 2000000 oper No oper Y oper Rapid 2000000 8000 0002a9608b6b 0 8000 0002a9608b6b 8003 Designated 0 Stp Port eth1 PortId 8001 in Bridge br0 Priority State PortPathCost Point2Point Edge Partner RSIP BPDU rx 128 Disabled Uptime 159092 admin Auto oper 20000000 admin Auto oper Yes admin Y oper Y oper Rapid 0 Stp Port eth2 PortId 8002 in Bridge br0 Priority State PortPathCost Point2Point Edge Partner RSIP BPDU rx 128 Disabled Uptime 619457 admin Auto oper 20000000 admin Auto oper Yes admin Y oper Y oper Rapid 0 Fig 7 21 Menu Switch settings RSTP RSTP service status RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 91 Configuration 7 5 2 Interface Port Port settings Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings Status gt Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Local RAy2 17L 10 49 Link Ok Port Port advanced PIRL Egress queue Port name p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 Link status down copper down SFP Speed duplex n a n a SFP info No SFP module Port enable v Y Auto negotiation Y Y Speed duplex auto auto S 1000 Mbps auto v Flow control asymmetric receive v asymmetric receive v Force flow control 1000
202. iguration Status Link settings General Radio gt Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Local RAy2 17L 11 02 Services Service access Service channel IPv4 address Local IPv4 address Peer Netmask Gateway Management VLAN 1 tag 2nd tag Internal VLAN Services Web server CLI telnet CLI SSH SNMP SNMP community string SNMP trap IP LED indicators Internal link watchdog USB accessories Local direct 192 168 141 226 192 168 141 227 24 255 255 255 0 192 168 141 254 Users Peer direct 192 168 141 227 192 168 141 226 24 255 255 255 0 192 168 141 254 VID Protocol VID Protocol 1 802 1q 1 802 1q 4094 802 1q 4094 802 1q 2 2 Local Peer on on v on on v racom snmp racom snmp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Note Individual SNMP traps can be activated at Alarms gt Config Y Y Apply Cancel Refresh Show defaults Show backup Fig 7 9 Menu Link settings Service access Services Service channel standard There are two modes of accessing the internal management system of the microwave link standard and direct Both units are configured with the separate IP addresses Netmasks Gateways and Management VLANs IP addresses of both units doesn t have to belong in to the same sub net The Internal VLAN is re
203. ination 98 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration PIRL PIRL Port based Ingress Rate Limiting has the task of arranging the transfer of frames ensuring as few frames as possible are discarded and that ports are not blocked Diagram of framework processing options are available within the QoS PIRL and Egress queue control menus Earess queue contol IP header 3 rd layer 6 bits Scheduling mode 802 1p Mapping Priority overriding 1 VLAN based 2 SA based 3 DA based follow other ports Fig 7 24 PIRL and queues Frame The frame comes via port has a certain length and MAC addresses SA and DA The IP header carries the DSCP priority and may also carry the 802 1p VLAN priority QoS The Queue priority QPri is created based on preferences within the DSCP or 802 1p priority This priority takes values from 0 to 3 and controls the processing of frames inside the switch Untagged frames are provided with 802 1p priority by default Priorities may be remapped The priority can also be overwritten by the Advanced menu priority derived from a VLAN SA and or DA addresses The Frame priority FPri is processed in a similar manner Frame coming from the network and frame being sent to the network is marked by this priority PIRL Between the port and the common switch there may be between 1 and 5 flow
204. ing downwards at an angle Fig 6 1 Horizontal RX polarization Fig 6 2 Vertical RX polarization see the arrow sign see the arrow sign 42 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Installation Fig 6 3 Left side mounting Fig 6 4 Right side mounting horizontal RX polarization vertical RX polarization Fig 6 5 Right side mounting horizontal RX polarization RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 43 Installation Changing the mounting method An antenna bracket is supplied as standard partly assembled and ready for right side mounting On changing the Jirous antenna bracket for left side mounting the adjustment bolt part No 11 and swivel bolt part No 6 need to be unscrewed then shift the bracket body part No 5 to the other side of clamp plate part No 4 do not turn upside down and then insert bolt part No 6 into the second hole on the mounting plate holder and through the same hole on the clamp plate and secure in place with the nuts The adjustment bolt item No 11 and nuts are switched to the other side of the clamp plate part No 4 It is also necessary to switch the hanging bolt part No 7 on the antenna mounting plate to the second hole so that after switching sides with the antenna it is on the top again In the case of the antenna when changing the method of mounting from right side to left side it is only necessary to rotate the plastic cover of the antenna This is n
205. iod Pm dala Time zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time History SMT Gree Mez Logs Daylight saving off Programs Help Show defaults Fig 5 2 Configuration Menu Link settings General 38 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Step by step Guide 5 1 2 Menu Link Service access Services IPv4 address enter a valid IP address to access the drive The default IP address has to be replaced with a valid address Keeping the default address will probably lead to future problems in the network Netmask enter the network mask Gateway if necessary enter a gateway otherwise leave blank Enable access protocols that you are going to need For security reasons do not enable more than is necessary HTTP S allow access to the web interface Telnet enabling access to the CLI interface using telnet protocol e SSH enabling access to the CLI interface using SSH protocol Management VLAN Enabling 802 1Q VLAN tag for separation of user and service operations Management VLAN id Defining 802 1Q VLAN tag for service operations Status Local RAy2 17L 11 02 Link settings Services USB accessories Users General Radio Service access Local Peer Service access Service channel direct direct Alarms IPv4 address Local 192 168 141 226 192 168 141 227 Switch settings IPv4 address Peer 192 168 141 227 192 168 141
206. ion burst amount 104 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Bucket rate factor Bucket increment Account discarded frames Account filtered frames Management non rate limit SA non rate limit DA non rate limit Accounted bytes EBS limit action This is a factor which determines the amount of tokens that need to be decremented for each rate resource decrement which is done periodically based on the Com mitted Information Rate Bucket increment Bl indicates the amount of tokens that need to be added for each byte of the incoming frame This parameter decides whether the ingress rate limiting logic accounts for frames that have been discarded by the queue controller due to output port queue conges tion reasons To account for all frames coming into a given port associated with this rate resource this parameter needs to be set This parameter decides whether the ingress rate limiting logic accounts for frames that have been discarded because of ingress policy violations To account for all frames coming into a given port associated with this rate resource this parameter needs to be set When this parameter is disabled all frames that are classified by the ingress frame classifier as MGMT frames would be considered to be ingress rate limited as far as this particular ingress rate resource is concerned When this parameter is enabled all frames that are classified as MGMT frames by the ingres
207. iorities The priority determined by the frames VID can however be overridden by the frames SA and or DA Priority Overrides Force default Force to use Default VID When 802 1q is enabled on this port and this parameter is VID enabled all Ingress frames VID are ignored and the Default VID is assigned and re placed into the frame if the frame egresses tagged When this parameter is disabled all IEEE802 3ac Tagged frames with a non zero VID use the frames VID unmodified When 802 1q is disabled on this port this bit has no effect Default VID Default VLAN Identifier When 802 1q is enabled on this port the Default VID parameter is used as the IEEE Tagged VID added to untagged or priority tagged frames during egress that ingressed from this port It is also used as a tagged frame s VID if the frame s VID was 0x000 i e itis a priority tagged frame or if the port s Force Devault VID is enabled When 802 1q is disabled on this port the Default VID field is assigned to all frames entering the port whether tagged or untagged This assignment is used internal to the switch FID Port s Default Filtering Information Database FID This parameter can be used with non overlapping VLANs to keep each VLAN s MAC address mapping database sep arate from the other VLANs This allows the same MAC address to appear multiple times in the address database at most one time per VLAN with a different port mapping per entry This field is overriden b
208. is parameter is accessible by the CPU s Ingress Header so the CPU can enable and disable MGMT and forcing on a frame by frame bases NOTE Learning is disabled on MGMT frames so enabling this parameter also disables learning on frames entering this port Hold at 1 Hold Aging ATU Entries at an Entry State value of 1 When this parameter is disabled a zero normal Aging occurs for ATU entries associated with this port When this parameter is enabled ATU entries associated with this port will age down to an Entry state of 1 but will not go to 0 This feature can be used for example to keep dynamic records in the ATU table ATU refresh unlocked Normal address learning is enabled known Auto refreshing of known addresses will occur even if this port is Locked Already known addresses will be auto refreshed i e their Entry State will be updated to 0x7 whenever this address is used as a source address in a frame on this port even when this port is Locked locked CPU directed learning needed for 802 1X MAC authentication is enabled Automatic SA learning and refreshing is disabled in this mode DA mapping When this parameter is enabled normal switch operation occurs where a frame s DA is used to direct the frame out of the correct port When this parameter is disabled the frame will be sent out of the port defined by EgressFloods even if the DA is found in the address database The static ATU table records are used even in DA mapping disa
209. l Network mode uses industry standard IEEE 802 3ac Tagged or Untagged frames Tagged frames use an Ether Type of 0x8100 Ports that are expected to be connected to standard Ethernet devices should use this mode DSA Inactive options are not required provider Provider mode uses user definable Ether Types per port see Ether type parameter to define that a frame is Provider Tagged Ports that are connected to standard Provider network devices or devices that use Tagged frames with an Ether Type other than 0x8100 should use this mode Frames that ingress this port with an Ether Type that matches the port s Ether Type parameter will be considered tagged will have the tag s VID and PRI bits assigned to the frame i e they will be used for 96 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration ether switching and mapping and will have the Provider Tag removed from the frame If subsequent Provider Tags are found following the 1st Provider Tag they too will be removed from the frame with their VID and PRI bits being ignored Modified frames will be padded if required Frames that ingress this port with an Ether Type that does not match the Ether Type parameter will be considered untagged The ingressing frames are modified so they are ready to egress out Customer ports Normal Network Frame Mode ports unmodified Frames that egress this port will always have a tag added even if they were already tagged The added tag will
210. lave mode can be manually configured auto Automatic MASTER SLAVE configuration master Manual configure as MASTER slave Manual configure as SLAVE The device can be placed in energy detect power down modes by selecting either of the two energy detect modes Both modes enable the PHY to wake up on its 94 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration own by detecting activity on the Ethernet cable The energy detect modes only apply to the copper media In the first sense mode if the PHY detects energy on the line it starts to Auto Ne gotiate sending FLPs Fast Link Pulse for 5 seconds If at the end of 5 seconds the Auto Negotiation is not completed then the PHY stops sending FLPs and goes back to monitoring received energy If Auto Negotiation is completed then the PHY goes into normal 10 100 1000 Mbps operation If during normal operation the link is lost the PHY will re start Auto Negotiation If no energy is detected after 5 seconds the PHY goes back to monitoring received energy In sense pulse mode the PHY sends out a single 10 Mbps NLP Normal Link Pulse every one second Except for this difference this is identical to the previous mode sense operation If the device is in sense mode it cannot wake up a connected device therefore the connected device must be transmitting NLPs If the device is in sense pulse mode then it can wake a connected device off Off sense pulse Sense and periodically tra
211. lic EU Part Number Description RAy2 10 Unit RAy2 10 2x Gb Eth RAy2 11 Unit RAy2 11 2x Gb Eth RAy2 17 Unit RAy2 17 2x Gb Eth RAy2 24 Unit RAy2 24 2x Gb Eth a A f Nove Mesto na Morave 15 of March 2015 TES gt Jiri Hruska CEO Cy US RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic WWW racom eu Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu ver 1 1 Fig 11 5 Country of Origin Declaration 246 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Antenna dimensions Appendix A Antenna dimensions Example antenna s diameter of 68 and 90 cm More on www racom eu Fig A 1 Jirous antenna 68 Fig A 2 Jirous antenna 90 http www racom eu eng products microwave link html download RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 247 Rain zone map Appendix B Rain zone map EA EN Te ST ee 5 6491 0114 TE Aven c a eae 0 Ve NI E LX Gn AN E S RSS P AMA _ E A gat aay 1T A Sl Pr J LUP TIT a CAT MBR i uz up LS y uu le H EAN H E o A o o 248 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o IP address in the PC Windows XP Appendix C IP address in the PC Windows XP Setting up the IP address in the PC For configuration of the link a suitable IP address has to be set up in the PC for example 192 168 169 160
212. limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 50 36 8 89 7 5 12 23 10 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 100 80 9 82 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 125 102 4 78 18 5 24 33 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 150 129 8 75 21 5 28 35 26 32 12 5 15 8 128 QAM 175 155 5 71 25 0 30 35 28 32 9 5 12 8 256 QAM 200 170 7 68 26 5 33 35 31 32 6 5 9 8 ver 1 0 RAy2 24 Channel spacing 40 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 qB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 68 150 1 87 7 5 12 33 10 29 22 4 24 8 16 QAM 136 110 0 80 15 0 19 33 17 129 18 4 21 8 32 QAM 170 139 2 76 18 5 24 133 21 29 16 4 19 8 64 QAM 204 176 5 73 21 5 27 33 25 29 14 4 16 8 128 QAM 238 211 4 69 25 0 30 37 28133 10 4 12 8 256 QAM 272 2324 67 26 5 33 37 30 33 8 4 10 8 ver 1 1 218 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 24 Channel spacing 50 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User
213. llback 63 166 RSS indication 57 RSS indicator 150 RSTP 91 138 S safety 239 scheduling mode 108 service access 37 72 setup parameters 61 spectrum analyzer 152 SSH access 165 start 8 36 start up 57 statistics radio link 68 RMON 85 status bar 63 LED 25 menu 65 STU 123 T tables duplex 177 188 205 216 frequencies 176 181 power 177 188 205 216 radio parameters 178 range 177 188 205 216 RAy2 10 177 RAy2 11 A B 188 RAy2 11 C D 204 RAy2 17 205 RAy2 24 216 speeds 174 technical parameters 172 time 69 troubleshooting 170 trunk 140 U USB accessories 75 V VLAN 72 118 VTU 125 W wifi adapter 35 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 261 262 Revision History Appendix I Revision History RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 263 Revision History Revision 1 0 2014 05 28 First issue Revision 1 1 2014 06 04 Name plate changes Revision 1 2 2014 07 15 RAy2 11 C D user speed and CS correction Revision 1 3 2014 07 25 Accessory supplemented Revision 1 4 2014 08 12 RAy2 11 A B frequency range corrected Revision 1 5 2014 09 01 Several channels added to RAY2 11 A B H L switching warning ETH cable grounding Overview diagram of the unit IP address setting in Windows 7 and Windows 8 PC Revision 1 6 2014 09 10 Menu description updated for fw 1 3 3 0 Revision 1 7 2014 09 12 Changed the Upper channels labeling at RAy2 17 RA
214. luding those with errors RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 87 Configuration Size 1024 max Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of between octets 1024 and MaxSize see MTU parameter octets inclusive including those with errors Histogram Frame size histogram counters can count received and or transmitted octets The mode counters of histogram counters is indicated here mode Measure This is the time interval the diff column is valid for The diff column shows the difference time of the actual value of the counters at the moment of pressing the Difference button and the value of the counters at the moment of pressing the Refresh button Refresh In another way The Difference counter reference value can be reset by pressing the Difference Refresh button The time point at which the Difference counter sample is triggered and the diff value is calculated is defined by pressing the Difference button The total column always shows the actual values It is refreshed either by pressing the Refresh and also the Difference button 88 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Queue allocation Status Link settings General Radio Service access Alarms Switch settings gt Status Interface Qos Advanced Tools Local Unit A 07 51 Link Ok Peer Unit B 0 Port status RMON counters Queue allocation Register dump RSTP Free queue buffers 510 Port name p2 Et
215. mat for bits per second xx xx Mbps Ly auto where xx xx Mbps Egress speed limit Ly L1 L2 L3 which Ethernet layer is used for speed calculation auto gives information about active Speed guard function Message format for frames per second xx xx fps where xx xx fps Egress frames per second limit Link mode Eth1 2 Status of ethernet interface Current bit rate 10 10BASE T 100 100BASE TX and 1000 1000BASE T and state of duplex FD full du plex HD half duplex 7 3 4 Status Service access MAC address HW address of the Ethernet module IPv4 address IP address in the standard dotted decimal notation including the bit width of netmask after the forward slash Management VLAN Service access via VLAN management only Services Services enabled for unit management and monitoring Web Telnet SSH SNMP NTP 7 3 5 Status Radio link statistics Information on statistical data Statistics Cleared Time of log clearing Statistics Period Period of log refresh Radio link statistics Overall Link Uptime Overall time the link has been connected Overall Link Downtime Overall time the link has been disconnected Reliability The ratio of Uptime and Downtime Current Link Uptime Current time the link has been connected The Longest Drop The longest downtime period recorded The Last Drop Length of the last link interruption Number of Drops Number of link interruptions 68 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r
216. me admin and password admin and is assigned the highest level of permissions cli_super This user then assigns other users to the system along with their level of permissions Service access has three levels of permissions Numbers of users that can be defined in the system Permissions No of users cli_guest 10 cli_admin 10 cli_ Super 2 Permissions defined in the system cli guest cli admin cli super Create new user No No Yes Change own password Yes Yes Yes Delete user No No Yes Copy Mirror permissions local to peer No No Yes Configure and modify link settings No Yes Yes The system prevents the user from deleting both cli super accounts The logged on user is shown in the top right of the screen There can be different users on either end of the link Important AN It is strongly recommended that the default password admin is changed Similarly all other users should change their password Using the CLI itis appropriate to supplement the SSH key 76 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Local Peer Username Group Password SSH key List of users on Local and Peer stations This name is entered at Login to log into the link management User group to which the user belongs cli_guest Read Only cli_admin Configure and modify link settings cli_super Configure and modify user accounts and link settings Information about whether user has a password Information about whether user has at least
217. mensions Communication unit ODU Outer size 244 x 244 x 157 mm Weight RAy2 10 2 8 kg RAy2 11 2 8 kg RAy2 17 2 5 kg RAy2 24 2 5 kg Diameters of supplied antennas RAy2 units are ready for direct mounting to Jirous Class 2 antennas Individual datasheets are accessible here Tab 3 2 Overview of antennas 10 11 GHz 17 GHz 24 GHz diameter gain diameter gain diameter gain 38 cm 29 0 dBi 40cm 34 8 dBi 40 cm 36 8 dBi 65cm 35 5 dBi 68cm 38 6 dBi 68cm 41 7 dBi 90cm 37 5 dBi 90cm 41 0 dBi 90cm 44 0 dBi 120cm 441 0 dBi 120 cm 43 7 dBi 120 cm 46 6 dBi Andrew Class 2 or 3 or Arkivator antennas can also be used but require an antenna mounting kit Flexible waveguide is a general purpose option for any antenna usage Name plate The plate contains name bar code record CE label etc Type RAy2 product line identification Code detailed identification of the unit type for details see Section 3 7 Ordering codes S N serial number MW link consists of two separated units with two different serial numbers QR code www link to the latest version of the User manual Power DC supply connector polarity marks Prom AZU Type RAy2 24 Code RAy2 24 C 1 383 Or TX RX 24 000 24 250 GHz 24 000 24 250 GHz e F PoE IEEE 802 3at www racom eu pena 20 60V max 1 5A Made in Czech Republic Fig 3 9 Name plate 1 http en jirous com
218. must first upload the ssh key Set Password settings New password Repeat password Working with ssh key Delete Clear all ssh keys from user account Set replace Add a new key If there already was any key s it will be overwritten Add Add a new key You can enter multiple ssh keys in this way Insert key file Save the menu content by clicking on the button Apply Backup user The user settings can be backed up see Tools Maintenance Backup 78 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Delete user Users at level cli_super have a Delete button next to each user Delete a user using this button without being asked to confirm deletion Users at level cli_super cannot both be deleted Add user The button is located on the bottom bar For level cli super users the Add user button is active Use it to create a new user within any group Username Name of new user Group The group to which this user is assigned New password Password for this user Confirm password Repeat password SSH key If you want the user to have access using ssh protocol and identity verification using ssh key enter the ssh key here Create a new user account by clicking on the button Apply Mirror users The button is located on the bottom bar For level cli_super users the Mirror users button is active This function will copy all user accounts from Local unit to Peer unit All existing u
219. n a radio network See Fig 6 40 Antenna lobe diagram Fig 6 41 Signal strength graph provides an indication of comparative signal strength from different beams emitted from a directional antenna Side lobe level Side lobes 180 30 0 30 180 Angle Degrees Main lobe Directivity dBi Fig 6 40 Antenna lobe diagram Fig 6 41 Signal strength graph Placing the antennas to the correct antenna alignment is very important to ensure the strongest signal is received Fig 6 42 Correct alignment diagram 58 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Examples 40 20 0 20 40 G dbi N o 40 20 0 20 40 Fig 6 43 Radiation diagrams Installation G dbi N o 40 20 0 20 40 G dbi N o 10 Both antennas should be oriented towards each other using the peaks of the radiation diagram Adjust the antenna alternately in the horizontal and vertical axes and monitor the resulting signal strength Use the calculation of the expected RSS with the precision of several dBm as guidance Side lobes transmit a signal ca 20 dBm weaker see the Microwave link Calculation http www racom eu eng products microwave link html calculation RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 59 Installation The resulting RSS helps distinguish between the states A A and C C which appear similar It also
220. n be Paused or Back Pressured off to prevent a port stall through jamming The Flow Control on the port is temporarily disabled when the Pause refresh frames count exceeds the value of this parameter Setting this parameter to O will allow continuous jamming to be received on this port Limit the number of continuous Pause refresh frames that can be transmitted from this port assuming each Pause refresh is for the maximum pause time of 65536 slot times When full duplex Flow Control is enabled on this port this parameter is used to limit the number of Pause refresh frames that can be generated from this port to keep this port s link partner from sending any data Clearing this parameter to 0 will allow continuous Pause frame refreshes to egress this port as long as this port remains congested Setting this parameter to 1 will allow 1 Pause frame to egress from this port for each congestion situation Setting this parameter to 2 will allow up to 2 Pause frames to egress from this port for each congestion situation etc Ignore Frame checksum FCS or in other words Force good FCS in the frame When this parameter is not set default behaviour frames entering this port must have a good CRC or else they are discarded When this parameter is set the last four bytes of frames received on this port are overwritten with a good CRC and the frames are accepted by the switch assuming that the frame s length is good and it has a dest
221. n is saved to backup file which is downloaded to management PC The backup file name contains the date time and RAy serial number as follows yyyyMMddhhmm_ SN cnf backup tgz It can be either a full configuration or a difference to the de fault configuration Upload configuration from a backup file into buffer The cur rent unit configuration is not affected The uploaded configur ation can be displayed using Show backup button on partic ular configuration screens The configuration of the entire unit can be restored from this buffer using Restore button below After the configuration backup file has been loaded into the unit buffer using Upload button above the whole unit con figuration can be restored using Restore button It is possible to make a temporary backup of the unit configuration The backup is Internal backup stored directly in the unit FLASH memory Local Peer O O Link O O Switch Users Settings Local L P oO L o s U Users Local L O P L S U Internal backup Internal restore Internal restore HW button Backup to external file Upload file amp restore NOTE The internal backup is deleted if factory settings or firmware upgrade are performed Make a temporary backup of the unit configuration locally in the unit FLASH memory Restore from the unit FLASH memory the temporary backup of the unit configuration The local temporary backup of the unit configurati
222. n the EBS limit has been exceeded Three types of action can be selected drop The frame that was received on the port will get discarded RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 105 Configuration Sampling mode Flow control de assertion Bucket type Mask operation Priority flow control In this mode an Ethernet flow control frame gets generated if the flow control is enabled for that port and sent to the source port but the incoming frame gets passed through the rate resource If the port is operating in half duplex mode then the port gets jammed accept The frame that was received on the port is accepted even though there are not enough tokens to accept the entire incoming frame This mode is expected to be selected for TCP based applications It is not recommended for media streaming applications where data timing is critical Flow control mode is expected to be programmed on ports that have a trusted flow control mechanism available The EBS limit action is a per port characteristic If a port has multiple rate resource buckets then all buckets enabled are expected to be programmed with the same EBS limit action This mode is used for sampling one out of so many frames bytes that are being monitored The stream could be identified by the ingress engine as a Policy mirror and packet sampling can be applied for that streeam using one of the rate resources In this mode once the rate resource s EBS Limit is exceede
223. nced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Add entry Edit Copy Delete Flush all Refresh Fig 7 35 Menu Switch settings Advanced VTU The VTU VLAN Table Unit records form the VLAN Table Primary Key The Ed icon indicates which parameter field is taken as the unique identifier in the database This field entry ensures each record is unique and must not be duplicated VID VLAN ID This parameter indicates the VID number that is associated with the Member tag VTU Priority VTU policy and the FID Forwarding Information Database number Label A custom string label for a VTU entry FID Forwarding Information Database number If separate address databases are used this parameter indicates the address database number to use for all frames assigned with this VID All MAC DA look ups and SA learning will refer to the address database number defined by the FID associated with the frame s VID Multiple VID s can use the same FID If separate address databases are not used the FID must be zero The ATU database records are joined with the VTU database records via this number SID 802 1s Information Database Number If 802 1s per VLAN spanning tree is being used this parameter indicate the spanning tree instance number to use for all frames assigned with this VID Multiple VID s can use the same SID The STU database re cords are joined with the VTU database records via this number RACOM s r o
224. nd RX channel GHz Used channels Both number of the channel and frequency in GHz are listed TX modulation Modulation type currently used for transmitting When adaptive modulation is enabled the ACM letters are displayed as well as information about 66 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration maximum permitted modulation current modulation ACM maximum modulation TX power dBm Current output power on the RF channel in dBm If ATPC is enabled the ATPC letters are displayed as well as information about maximum permitted power current power ATPC maximum power RSS dBm Received signal strength If ATPC is enabled the ATPC letters are dis played as well as information about threshold value for activation of power RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 67 Configuration control loop current RSS ATPC threshold RSS SNR dB Signal to Noise Ratio If ATPC is enabled the ATPC letters are displayed as well as information about threshold value for activation of power control loop current SNR ATPC threshold SNR BER Bit Error Rate is registered at the receiving end instantaneous value Link uptime Time elapsed since the current link connection has been established 7 3 3 Status Switch interface Egress rate limit Air Status of the Egress rate limitter on the Air interface The traffic can be limitted according to bits per second or frames per second Message for
225. ng information Management address IP address System Description Serial number Chassis Subtype Type e g RAY2 17 L IEEE 802 1 Port and Protocol VLAN ID Port and Protocol VLAN Identifier e g 300 0x012C but only if Management VLAN is enabled The message can be recorded and converted into a readable form using an LLDP client A suitable tool for this purpose is Wireshark IP traffic analyzing tool with free licenses available for both Windows and Linux To locate the message easily use the Capture filter ether proto 0x88cc in Wireshark Management address of the Peer station This address has to be set up when the Service channel is set to direct mode Mask for service access 24 by default Default gateway for service access empty by default Enables access via VLAN management Blocks access for https ssh and telnet con figuration via untagged packets without VLAN making only VLAN access possible VLAN management is off by default WARNING By enabling VLAN management ALL accesses are blocked for configuration using normal untagged LAN During tests you may enable VLAN management on one unit only if the Service channel standard Then it is possible to access the link via LAN and VLAN either directly or via radio link VLAN management id by default 1 This field must have a value entered even when VLAN management is not active Protocol 802 1q or 802 1ad RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 73 Config
226. nits to a PoE source and connect a PC to one of them for con figuration Take the following steps to establish a connection between the PC and RAy2 and perform a basic setup https 192 168 169 169 Device menu gt set IP Bridge menu gt radio Fig 5 1 Link Configuration RAy2 17 perpendicular holders 36 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Step by step Guide Warning Y During operation never bring the waveguides of the stations close to each other There is a risk of damaging sensitive input circuits 5 1 Service access The RAy2 link is supplied with a default configuration of access parameters Unit L has the service IP address 192 168 169 169 and mask 255 255 255 0 Unit U has the service IP address 192 168 169 170 and mask 255 255 255 0 access is allowed over HTTP HTTPS or SSH the username is admin and the password is also admin On your PC setup an IP address that is within the mask e g 192 168 169 180 Then open the https configuration interface e g https 192 168 169 169 Other access options are described in the chapter Configuration Link settings Service access of this manual When connection has been established use the Service access menu to customise access parameters Default IP addresses should be replaced with well chosen operating addresses Leaving default ad dresses in place can lead to network problems later The menu contains parameters for the entire link both
227. normal RSTP or force it to operate in slow STP mode In normal mode RSTP reverts back to STP on ports where it sees other hosts operating in STP mode Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Port priority The ports priority value is a number between 0 and 240 in increments of 16 with a default value of 128 Path cost The Path cost can be set automatically or manually Entering the value of zero sets this parameter automatically The automatic setup is based on link speed Edge Selecting the checkbox sets the port as an edge port If a port is an edge port it is assumed to be a leaf link in the graph not connected to any other bridges Receiving any STP BPDU s on a port configured as an edge port temporarily overrides edge port behaviour for the port MAC address The ports default MAC addresses are the same as the MAC address of the RAy2 unit RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 139 Configuration Trunk Status Local RAy2 17L 07 00 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17U Link settings Gbaa VLAN ST
228. nsitivity is needed to serve as a fade margin The minimum value of fade margin can be calculated from the requirement for link availability e g 99 999 of the time The required margin depends on the length of the link as well as other factors such as rain attenuation diffraction and multipath propagation If we ignore the additional loss along the path the received signal strength can be calculated using the formula for signal propagation in free space as follows PR P Gr Gp FSL Where 1 http www racom eu eng products microwave link html calculation_obsah 12 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Implementation Notes Pr received power level dBm Pr transmitted power dBm Gy transmitting antenna gain dBi Gg receiving antenna gain dBi FSL free space loss dB Pg must be Pg Ps Where Ps receiver sensitivity dBm The receiver s sensitivity defines the minimum level of the received signal at which the receiver is able to process the signal without losses or affecting the transmitted data for BER better then 105 2 1 3 Fade margin Determining sufficient fade margin is the most important step in microwave link design If the margin is too small the link will be unstable as a result sufficient availability of the link or quality of the provided services cannot be guaranteed On the other hand unnecessarily large margin makes the link more expensive higher performance larger and more expensive
229. nsmit NLP Energy Detect TM sense Sense only on Receive Energy Detect RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 95 Configuration Port advanced The unit internal Ethernet switch Port settings Status Local RAy2 17L 10 50 Link Ok Peer RAy2 1 Link settings Port Port advanced PIRL Egress queue General Port i Radio Pium p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air Service access Label Alarms Frame normal v normal v ether type DSA v normal Switch settings dan 0x9100 0x9100 OXDADA 0x9100 Status MTU B 10240 v 10240 v 1522 v 10240 gt Interface Pause limit in 0 0 0 0 Qos frame Pause Advanced limit out 3968 3968 3968 3968 frame Tools fora k Maintenance ucc Live data iaa Apply Refresh Show defaults Logs Fig 7 23 Menu Switch settings Port advanced Port name Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an external port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Label Custom port name Frame mode Ethernet Frame mode control defines the expected Ingress and the generated Egress tagging frame format for this port as follows normal Norma
230. ntennaS dio oae te enan eee at ene aera EON RIS een Dots Toce uie Eu Sa DR a aeo 57 GLO SA LINK test sioe rii mr c te edite E Eee ERRAT e uS Tele e En does E 61 6 5 4 Parameters setup reirei eee ea aa a E Ea E AEE e aai EE Ea RRE aeaii 61 roe ra A a A A AD A AAA EEEE 62 LEAN AU CIN a TR 62 PA A A AO O 63 FB SUAS rs each ecran ae een ital eri ied 65 Foils Status General etre ee tete ie Lu volo E e Fide ais 66 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 3 RAy2 Microwave Link 3 2 Stat s Radio uice ee naa b E RO ERR OR Ade 66 7 3 3 Status Switch interface esses e enne nnne nnns 68 7 3 4 Status Service access coccoccccoconoconcconnnonnnonnonnnonnno nono nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 68 7 3 5 Status Radio link statistics esses 68 VS REI SUIS ester 69 TALL GONG e isa bes onc I UE 69 12 e O O EE ON 70 TA SONICO access o e Eel tore Re AA edd ae EE vedi aes 72 TAA Alarms ndis coat i hie ee ee e Gel E n eec org 80 FeO SOIC SONI E ES 83 7 5 Status NN 83 7 5 2 Interface e ecce Tour e Feo ai ebb enu uat d de ri e i dvies dr ep e Dt ua e e d OY 92 T D QOS escasa O 111 TEA AdvaliGeg us cia sc Isi ra io ii ios 114 7 6 TOONS tet c d eR MEER e eR RE HER tes RR IRE XX E OC ER Ce RU RR ERE Ques 142 7 67 Malirnterarice tetti bri Eoo ree ce RH tet parada fovet Cort 142 7 6 2 Live data i uc e e e Ra e RAE RE REA ae EIER EE ERR TER EP RETRO ERR 150 A TET 153 JE S
231. ntry with a PortVec of all zeros Used to discard frames from known untrusted sources drop Ingressing frames will be mapped to the CPUDest if their SA field is to CPU in the ATU s address database as a Static entry with a PortVec of all zeros and the frame is not otherwise filtered Otherwise the frames will be discarded if their SA field is not in the ATU s address database i e it s a new or unknown Source Address or if this port s bit is not set in the PortVec bits for the frames SA i e this port is not the source port for that MAC address This mode is a form of MAC based 802 1X where some frames can be forced to the CPU for further authentication prior to full authorization When this parameter is set to zero normal address learning and frame policy occurs When this parameter is non zero the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on this port are limited to the value of this parameter Automatic learning and frame policy will occur normally until the number of unicast MAC addresses auto learned from this port reaches the port s LearnLimit addresses that were learned from this port but were aged out are not counted i e this register limits the number of active unicast MAC addresses associated to this port When the LearnLimit has been reached any frame that ingresses this port with a source MAC address not already in the ad dress database that is associated with this port will be discarded the port will act as if the
232. nu Tools RX constellation Constellation diagram shows the quality of received signal RX modulation Modulation level of RX channel Buffer Number of plotted points Refresh One time update of diagram RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 151 Configuration Frequency spectrum analyzer Status Local Unit A 09 57 Link settings Bar indicators RX constellation diagram Frequency spectrum analyzer General Radio Service access RSS dBm Alarms 10 Switch settings Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance ain EN NN gt Live data History Logs 1740 1744 17 18 17 22 17 26 Programs t GHz Help Frequency spectrum measure time single v Mute peer TX O Warning Before starting the Frequency spectrum analyzer make sure that the link can really go down it will User da interrupted Enable Start Fig 7 50 Menu Tools Frequency analyzer A very useful tool for identifying in band interference and locating a free channel It is not a full blown spectrum analyzer as it scans the spectrum with 7MHz channel resolution The accuracy of measured results is given by the accuracy of measuring RSS Warning Y Running spectrum measurement causes interruption of user data flow between stations Enable Opening analyzer functions Start Interrupts communication on the link and starts scanning frequencies in the band Spectrum Selection of measurement length in range measure time single sweep
233. of the mi crowave link The radio signal doesn t only radiate along the line of sight but also in the area around it i e in the so called 1st Fresnel zone Within this zone 90 of the energy is transmitted between the transmitter and receiver antenna This space has the shape of an ellipsoid If it is disturbed the link has poorer transmission properties and a higher quality antenna is required For this reason the position of the antenna can be just as important as its height above ground 60 of the 1st Fresnel zone is considered as the most important Fig 2 6 Fresnel zone The general equation for calculating the first Fresnel zone radius at any point P in between the endpoints of the link is the following Fafa dee d d Where F first Fresnel Zone radius in metres d distance of P from one end in metres d The distance of P from the other end in metres wavelength of the transmitted signal in metres The cross sectional radius of each Fresnel zone is the highest in the center of link shrinking to a point at the antenna on each end For practical applications it is often useful to know the maximum radius of the first Fresnel zone From the above formula calculation of the first Fresnel zone can be simplified to f aesr P where r max radius of first Fresnel zone m reducing the radius to 60 get values listed in the following table that define the space particularly sensitive to the presenc
234. om mendation ITU R F 387 rec 1 2 for 40 MHz bandwith see also the note 5 below Bandwith 40 MHz ACMA means that the table describes the 40 MHz channel plan defined by ITU R F 387 rec 1 1 b applied e g in Australia 3 The complete frequency range approx 4 Duplex spacing the frequency difference between the Upper and Lower channels in a duplex pair Optional The minimum and the maximal duplex spacing used in the table of frequencies 5 The name of standard or recommendation defining the respective channel plan 6 Name of the sub band defined by channels in the table 7 Name of the Frequency table containing the channel set described see Configuration item Frequency tables 8 The channel number according to RAy unit configuration interface see Configuration item TX channel GHz 9 The nominal TX frequency of the Lower band channel 10 The nominal TX frequency of the Upper band channel 11 Table version 176 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters 10 3 RAy2 10 parameters 10 3 1 Upper Lower Limits RAy2 10 xA RAy2 10 xB TX power Min Max Modulation dBm dBm QPSK 10 13 16 QAM 10 11 32 QAM 10 11 64 QAM 10 10 128 QAM 10 9 256 QAM 10 8 ver 1 2 RAy2 10 xA RAy2 10 xB Duplex spacing Sub band MHz A All combinations of channels B All combinations of channels ver 2
235. on Out single The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experi enced exactly one collision This counter is applicable in half duplex only Out multiple The total number of successfully transmitted frames that experi enced more than one collision This counter is applicable in half duplex only Out excessive The number frames dropped in the transmit MAC because the frame experienced 16 consecutive collisions This counter is applic able in half duplex only Out late The number of times a collision is detected later than 512 bits times into the transmission of a frame This counter is applicable in half duplex only Out filtered Total number of good frames that were filtered due to egress switch policy rules Frame size histogram counters Size 64 octets Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of exactly 64 octets including those with errors Size 65 127 Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of between octets 65 and 127 octets inclusive including those with errors Size 128 255 Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of between octets 128 and 255 octets inclusive including those with errors Size 256 511 Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of between octets 256 and 511 octets inclusive including those with errors Size 512 1023 Total frames received and or transmitted with a length of between octets 512 and 1023 octets inclusive inc
236. on can be restored using the hardware button The HW button is located next to the DC connector within the port marked P The rollback and reboot functions are suppressed while restoring from internal backup All changes are applied imme diately Should the time zone be changed the unit has to be restarted for changes to take effect Press the HW button for the required time interval of 5 seconds The button being pressed is confirmed by the Status LED flashing green After the 5 seconds guard time the unit restores to customer settings Saving and restoring user accounts Backup local unit user accounts to an external file The file is downloaded to management PC NOTE The super user privileges are necessary to be able to perform this action Restoring user accounts from an external backup file Default settings Applying default values to configuration parameters RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 143 Configuration LP Restore link Whole set of parameters from the Link settings menu tree is ojo L settings affected T sg Local amp Peer U LP Restore switch Whole set of parameters from the Switch settings menu tree L settings Local is affected O S U Factory set WARNING Using the factory settings function will revert the tings Local unit to its original state All configuration items user accounts LP measured values and system messages logs will be irre o L versibly deleted os WARNIN
237. onfiguration RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 103 Configuration Each resource defines a rule filter for the incoming frame If the rule is met the frame is affected as set by the EBS limit action parameter If the incoming frame doesn t meet any rule it is not affected by PIRL The frame is accepted and forwarded further to the switch engine Port name CIR estimated Burst allocation b Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 Each port can be assigned up to five different ingress rate resources Each resource defines a rule filter for the incoming frame If the rule is met the frame is affected as set by the EBS limit action parameter If the incoming frame doesn t meet any rule it is not affected by PIRL The frame is accepted and forwar ded further to the switch engine The Committed Information Rate CIR is dependent on the Bucket Rate factor and the Bucket increment The calculation is estimated as the real data throughput depends on frame size The Accounted bytes parameter affects this as well
238. onfiguration Username Password Log in go to secured version Fig 7 2 Login Rollback function If you interrupt the connection on an operating link by entering inappropriate radio link parameters the original parameters will be restored after 1 minute The connection is automatically restored 7 2 Status bar sime Logout RAy2 Microwave Link Co RATCOM Status Local Site A 13 04 Link Ok Peer Site B 13 04 Link settings Paine Lo Fig 7 3 Status bar 1 The Status bar is located on the upper part of the screen below the title bar It consists of 3 fields Local unit status unit assigned to the IP address entered in the browser or CLI Localto Peer Link status e Peer unit status Local and Peer field displays Station name according to configuration e Actual time valid for respective unit Warning or Alarm icon in case of warning or alarm Link field display Status of the link between both sides of the microwave link Warning icon when the link is not capable of user data transfer The Link status can be one of the following values UNKNOWN Unit start up The initialization is not yet finished SETUP Unit initialization according to valid configuration SINGLE Unit in operation status Link to peer unit is not established CONNECTING Connection to peer unit in progress AUTHORIZING Authorization of the peer unit in progress OK Link is connected Peer unit is authorized ANA
239. opean Union Directive 1999 5 EC ANNEX IV Document No 0120 CC V0031 14 Issued by Cesky metrologicky institut Okruzni 31 Brno CR 13 of February 2015 Notified Body No 1383 CE 1383 The above named equipment is classified as a Class 2 radio equipment and it is marked with Equipment Class Identifier in accordance with Commission Decision 2000 299 EC Nove Mesto na Morave 5 of March 2015 Jiri Hruska CEO 4 Ce UW Y RACOM s r o Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic www racom eu Tel 420 565 659 511 Fax 420 565 659 512 E mail racom racom eu J Cc ver 1 3 Fig 11 3 Declaration of Conformity for RAy2 17 244 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Safety environment licensing EP RACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity RAy2 24 We Manufacturer RACOM Address Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic VAT CZ46343423 declare under our own responsibility that the product Product RAy2 24 Purpose of use Short Range Device equipment for data transmission to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the essential requirements and other relevant requirements of the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity The product is in conformity with the followin
240. or precisely setting the direction of the antenna Both spanner and key can be found in the RAy Tool set for installing RAy2 microwave bridges It is advisable to lightly lubricate the retaining screws eg by the supplied grease Fig 6 7 Close up image of the mounted bracket showing numbered parts a Prepare the antenna bracket based on the diameter of the mast tube For smaller diameters face the bent part of the saddle plate part No 3 inwards For larger diameters it should face outwards Screw the bolts part No 1 into the clamp plate part No 4 so that they protrude approx 1 cm through the clamp plate Clamp the saddle plate to the mast by tightening the nuts part No 2 on the bolts Fig 6 8 Position of the saddle plate for Fig 6 9 Position of the saddle plate for 40 80 mm g 65 115 mm RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 45 Installation b Slide the antenna bracket onto the mast tube and clamp to the mast by tightening the nuts Recommendation Keep the gap between the two saddle plates part No 3 as wide as possible so the horizontal angle adjustement screw can fit in this gap The range of horizontal adjustement is consequently wider This has a bigger effect when the mast diameter is smaller ES Fig 6 10 Attaching the bracket to the mast tube Fig 6 11 Bracket on the mast tube c Screw the hanging bolt part No 7 into the upper hole of the mounting plate so that
241. ot only important from an aesthetic point of view so that the RACOM logo is not upside down but also because there is a discharge channel on the lower edge of the dish except for 4380 mm dishes RIGHT SIDE MOUNTING LEFT SIDE MOUNTING Fig 6 6 Changing the mounting method When changing the polarization from horizontal to vertical only the FOD unit needs to be turned through 90 around the central antenna pin by unscrewing the four bolts on the dish using a No 6 Allen key Important A The RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 links are equipped with a polarization duplexer and work in both polarizations simultaneously see Cross polarization One side of the link must therefore be installed in vertical polarization and the other in the horizontal polarization 44 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Installation 6 2 2 Mounting the FOD unit on the antenna RAy2 microwave bridge equipment is generally supplied as several component parts packaged separ ately in a box Two parabolic antennas with assembled mounting plates There are also 4 screws in a small plastic bag in the box Two brackets for mounting the antenna to the mast Two FOD stations each separate in a box in a single package Other accessories based on the order placed for more detailed information see chapter Chapter 4 Accessories A No 17 spanner and a No 6 Allen key are required for mounting the mechanical parts of the antenna Spanner No 17 serves f
242. output port on the RAy according to the DA in the frame Records are arranged according to the FID and the MAC addresses The table is created and maintained based on informations contained in incoming frames learning Manual recording is also possible The record can be dynamic or static Priority frames with a static record can be overridden by the SA or DA The results of searching the ATU provide the set of output ports or trunk number RSTP The RSTP demon turns off redundant paths through the network switch ports or re activates them in the case of failure in other branch The Global section of this menu contains switch priority for the RSTP and necessary time constants The Port settings section holds the value of each port as seen by the RSTP This information indicates if the RSTP shuts down or restarts a redundant port if a route is interrupted Trunk The Trunk enables the distribution of data load on multiple ports The ratio of distribution is determined by parameter Balancing mode 116 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Abbreviations used in the Advanced menu DA SA LAN VLAN VID VTU SID STP STU FID ATU MGMT BPDU 802 1d 802 1s 802 1q 802 1p DSCP QoS FPri QPri Trunk Destination and Source frame address MAC Local Area Network Virtual LAN menu of parameters related to the VLAN VLAN network ID VLAN Table Unit according to VID assignes SID and FID to the fr
243. owed to go through the bucket All calculations for this bucket are done in tokens Therefore both bucket decrementing and incrementing is performed using tokens i e frame bytes are converted into bucket tokens for calculation purposes The device supports a color blind leaky bucket scheme The traffic below Committed Burst Size limit CBS Limit is passed without any further actions If the traffic burst were to continue and the bucket token depth approaches closer to the Excess Burst Size limit EBS Limit by less than the CBS Limit then a set of actions are specified Note that if the frame gets discarded then the equivalent number of tokens for that frame will not get added to the bucket There are the two default ingress limiting rules already configured in the switch default configuration They limit the maximum allowed ARP traffic comming to the CPU port to 10Mbps from Eth1 and 10Mbps from Eth2 ports RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 101 Configuration Passed frame size y based token update EBS Limit Possible actions Discard the frame Pass the frame and All bucket calculations send flow control frame done in units of tokens back to the source CBS Limit Pass the traffic EBS Excess Burst Size CBS Committed Burst Size CIR Committed Information Rate CIR Fig 7 26 Leaky bucket Primary key The live data icon indicates which parameter field is taken as the unique identifier in the d
244. quired to encapsulate the internal service traffic between both units of the microwave link There are additional internal service ad dresses used for this internal service traffic see Pv4 address Local section for further details 72 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration IPv4 address Local Unknown IP address IPv4 address Peer Netmask Gateway Management VLAN VID Protocol direct Both units are configured with the separate IP addresses but with the same Netmask Gateway and the Management VLAN IP addresses of both units must belong in to the same sub net There is no need for Internal VLAN to handle the internal service traffic between both units of the microwave link No additional internal service ad dresses exist NOTE It is strongly recommended to use Management VLAN to encapsulate and prioritize the management traffic when the direct mode is selected If the Management VLAN is not used while in direct mode the internal service traffic is NOT prioritized Service IP address by default 192 168 169 169 for L unit and 192 168 169 170 for U unit Four addresses 169 254 173 236 30 are used for internal communication Must not be used as service IP address Those four addresses are not used while Service channel is set to direct mode For easier identification of service IP address RAy is equipped with LLDP protocol This protocol sends a broadcast every 60 seconds with the followi
245. r p6 Air p6 Air p6 Air Addentry Edit Copy Delete Flush all and use default Flush non static Fig 7 38 Menu Switch settings Advanced ATU The Address Translation Unit ATU in the device supports user commands to access the contents of the MAC address database There is one static record which can t be deleted This is the management CPU record The unicast frames directed to management are allowed to access the CPU port The VLAN tunnel parameter is also used to enable the AP frames to access the CPU port primary Key The Ed icon indicates which parameter field is taken as the unique identifier in the database This field entry enis taken as the unique identifiersures each record is unique and must not be duplicated FID Forwarding Information Database number If multiple address databases are not being used this parameter must remain zero If multiple address databases are being used this parameter is used to set the desired address database number that is to be asso ciated with this ATU Entry s MAC Address When frames ingress the switch the VID assigned to the frame is used to access the VTU The VTU returns the FID associated with that VID for MAC address lookups in to the ATU MAC Label A custom string label for an ATU entry MAC address associated with this ATU entry in the database number defined by the FID RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 133 Configuration Entry state Use MA
246. r 802 1q is enabled on the port or not If the port is configured in Provide Mode and this parameter is enabled frames that don t contain an Ether Type that matches the port s PortEType Ether type parameter that have a non zero VID will be discarded When this parameter is set to anything other than none VTU priority overrides can occur on this port A VTU priority override occurs when the determined VID of a frame results in a VID whose Use VID priority parameter is enabled When this occurs three other than none forms of priority overrides are possible none Normal frame priority processing occurs frame The VID priority value assigned to the frame s VID in the VLAN database is used to overwrite the frame s previously determined FPri frame priority If the frame egresses tagged the priority in the frame will be this new VID priority value the frame is permanently modified 120 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration queue The VID priority value assigned to the frame s VID in the VLAN database is used to overwrite the frame s previously determined QPri queue priority The QPri is used internally to map the frame to one of the egress queues inside the switch QPri override will not affect the contents of the frame in any way frame queue Both the above overrides take place on the frame The VTU Priority override has higher priority than the port s Default Priority and the frame s IEEE and or IP pr
247. r RAy2 10 242 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Safety environment licensing EP RACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity RAy2 11 We Manufacturer RACOM Address Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic VAT CZ46343423 declare under our own responsibility that the product Product RAy2 11 sub bandA 10 695 10 970 MHz 11 185 11 460 MHz sub band B 10 935 11 195 MHz 11 425 11 695 MHz Purpose of use Microwave IP Bridge to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the essential requirements and other relevant requirements of the Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity The product is in conformity with the following standards and or other normative documents Spectrum art 3 2 EN 302 217 2 2 V2 2 1 EMC art 3 1 b EN 301 489 1 V1 9 2 EN 301 489 4 V2 1 1 Safety art 3 1 a EN 60950 1 ed 2 2006 A1 2010 A2 2014 A11 2009 A12 2011 Cor 1 2012 Notified Body Opinion According to European Union Directive 1999 5 EC ANNEX IV Document No 0120 CC V0001 15 Issued by Cesky metrologicky institut Okruzni 31 Brno CR 5 of March 2015 Notified Body No 1383 C 1383 O The above named equipment is classified as a Class 2 radio equipment and it is marked with Equipment Class Identifier
248. r displays Link Ok 40 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Step by step Guide If the alarm message appears at Local or Peer this doesn t necessarily mean there is a problem The message indicates that the limit at any of the monitored parameters has been exceeded Es sential is the Link Ok message on the status bar The Status screen contains values for both Local and Peer units N A next to Peer indicates that the data from the Peer unit has not been transferred If Link is Ok simply click Refresh at the bottom of the screen and Peer data will be updated Menu Status Detailed Radio indicates link RSS and SNR values in case of ACM also the selected modulation and Netbitrate If the ATPC function is enabled menu Link settings Radio it also in dicates instantaneous max allowed power and for SNR and RSS values it indicates immediate target value size Menu Tools Live data Bar indicators displays current size of RSS SNR and BER Menu Tools Ping allows you to send a ping test to the selected IP address Try out the possibility of modulation Modulation ACM In menu Link settings Radio enable ACM Set the TX modulation parameter to the required maximum value In menu Status Brief Radio you can monitor Refresh or Start changes in used modulation based on the instantaneous SNR signal quality The status and quality of modulation is demonstrated well in menu Tools Live data RX cons
249. r status Checks buffer status e Saving into buffers cli fw load package f tmp bm4 RACOM 0 1 12 0 cpio A new fw package is loaded into the buffer 20 sec cli fw upload2peer The fw package is also loaded into the peer unit 20 sec Upgrade cli fw upgrade t b Firmware in both units will be replaced with new version from the buffer After 3 minutes this message appears Firmware upgrade started Estimated time to finish is 370 s Connection is terminated After a few minutes log in to RAy2 again 8 3 3 Remote unit authorization The RAy2 unit in default configuration establishes a connection with any remote unit and both units act as a communication pair Should the higher protection from the unauthorized communication take over be required it is possible to use the so called Secured mode of remote unit authorization This mode is based on locking the two specific units into one communication pair Units with Secured mode 168 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Command Line Interface activated refuse to make a connection with any other communication unit The units are locked using the unique authorization keys The keys are exchanged between the units concerned The authorization keys can be backed up to an external medium to be able to make a service unit exchange if necessary Should The Link authorization quard be disabled the user data occurs even it the remote unit is not authoriz
250. ransmitted on egress Ingress statistics counters In good octets In bad octets The sum of lengths of all good Ethernet frames received that is frames that are not bad frames The sum of lengths of all bad Ethernet frames received In unicasts In multicasts In broadcasts In pause In undersize In oversize In FCS errors In fragments The number of good frames received that have a Unicast destina tion MAC address The number of good frames received that have a Multicast destin ation MAC address NOTE This does not include frames counted in n broadcasts nor does it include frames counted in n pause The number of good frames received that have a Broadcast destin ation MAC address The number of good frames received that have a Pause destination MAC address Total frames received with a length of less than 64 octets but with a valid FCS Total frames received with a length of more than MaxSize octets but with a valid FCS Total frames received with a CRC error not counted in n fragments In jabber or In MAC RX errors Total frames received with a length of less than 64 octets and an invalid FCS In jabber Total frames received with a length of more than MaxSize octets but with an invalid FCS In MAC RX Total frames received with an RxErr signal from the PHY errors In discards Total number of frames that normally would have been forwarded but could not be due to a lack of buffer space
251. rding This Port state takes precedence over the port s Port State bits unless the port s Port State menu Interface Port advanced State is Disabled which prevents all frames from flowing Add entry Add a new STU database entry Edit Press the Edit button to open the configuration dialog of the selected STU database record NOTE Should the Primary key value be modified the other record identified by the entered Primary key is added if it doesn t exist yet or modified if it exists already Delete Delete the selected STU database record Status Local RAy2 17L 05 11 Link Ok Peer RAy2 17 Link settings ae z as VLAN STU vTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Radio Add STU entry SID P ou Service access Label all Alarms Port state Switch settings p2Eth1 forwarding v Status p4 Eth2 forwarding M Interface p5 CPU forwarding M QoS p6 Air forwarding v Advanced Tools Maintenance Apply Cancel Fig 7 34 Menu Switch settings Advanced STU edit 124 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration VTU Status Local RAy2 17L 09 05 Link Ok Peer RAy2 1 Link settings ae VLAN STU VTU ATU settings ATU Monitoring Policy RSTP Radio VTU table VIDA SID Z p2Eth1 p4Eth2 7 p5 CPU Service access 2 1 6 false egress un egress un egress un Alarms 5 vlan 5 0 2 off false egress tag egress un egress un Switch settings Status Interface Qos gt Adva
252. ress automatically v Fie and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks e diris Y 4 Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 II RTI v 4 Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 IP address 192 168 169 160 Y Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Subnet mask 25 255 255 0 v 4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Default gateway ns Uninsta operties m init dts nti Obtain DNS server address automatically Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and Properties On the General tab select Use the following IP address o Enter IP Address 192 168 169 160 o Set Subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 o Click OK to acknowledge these settings and close all windows RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 251 IP address in the PC Windows 7 Checking the IP address in the PC In Windows 7 proceed in the following manner Interconnect the configured unit and PC with an Ethernet cable Under the Start menu type the command cmd in the Search programs and files box and press Enter Inside the cmd exe window that opens enter the command ipconfig at the command prompt and find the information about IP address and mask among the list of messages returned Ethernet adapter Local firea Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix Link local IPv6 Address fe8B e8c2 4ffe 3b98 5988 108 IPv4 Address 192 168 169 168 Subnet Mask A Default Gateway Checking the PC unit connection u
253. rest are equally affected and is dependent on path length frequency and path inclination In addition it is strongly dependent on the geoclimatic factor K To calculate the probability of outage due to multipath propagation of microwave links the ITU R probability model can be used which describes a single frequency or narrowband fading distribution suitable for large fade depths A in the average worst month in any part of the world based on ITU R P 530 14 The calculation for detailed link design is given as follows 1 Py KoP4 1 e pl 03084 p0 00067h A 10 where d link distance km f frequency GHz h altitude of lower antenna m A fade depth dB K isgeoclimatic factor and can be obtained from K 4 1 6 0 0027dN1 The term dN1 is provided on a 1 5 grid in latitude and longitude in ITU R Recommendation P 453 The data are available in a tabular format and are available from the Radiocommunication Bureau BR E g in Central Europe the values dN1 range from 242 to 362 From the antenna heights h and h meters above sea level calculate the magnitude of the path in clination Ep mrad using the following expression Ih h PIU where d link distance km h he antenna heights above sea level m 16 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Implementation Notes 2 1 6 Fresnel zones calculation The position of obstacles between points of the bridge can significantly influence the quality
254. rowave Link RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 17 Channel spacing 14 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j ty Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 24 19 9 92 8 5 14 23 12 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 48 38 8 85 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 19 3 21 7 32 QAM 60 49 1 81 18 5 26 33 23129 17 1 5 19 9 64 QAM 72 623 78 21 5 28 137 26 33 14 2 17 1 6 128 QAM 84 73 6 75 25 0 30 37 28 133 12 2 14 6 256 QAM 96 81 2 73 28 0 33 37 31 33 10 2 12 6 ver 2 1 RAy2 17 Channel spacing 28 MHz ACCP operation Co channel rejection Adjacent channel Selectivi Raw User RSS SNR for j j y Modula Bit Bit BER 10 1 dB 3 dB 1 dB 3 dB tion Rate Rate RSS SNR declared limit declared limit declared limit declared limit H Mbps dBm dB dB dB dB dB QPSK 50 36 8 90 7 5 12 23 10 19 21 0 23 4 16 QAM 100 80 9 83 15 0 20 30 18 26 5 18 3 20 7 32 QAM 125 102 4 79 18 5 24 33 22129 16 5 19 9 64 QAM 150 129 8 76 21 5 28 35 26 32 12 5 15 8 128QA
255. s above Frame type Ethernet frame type often called EtherType is used to indicate which protocol is encapsulated in the payload of an Ethernet Frame This parameter is important when one protocol is encapsulated to another protocol Examples Eth type 0x8100 0x88a8 0x88e7 0x9100 Standard Comment IEEE 802 1q Double tagged Q in Q or C tag stacking on C tag C tag in IEEE 802 1ad frames IEEE 802 1ad S Tag IEEE 802 1ah S Tag backbone S Tag It is used very often For example an old non standard 802 1QinQ protocol uses this value See http en wikipedia org wiki EtherType for futher details MTU B MTU determines the maximum frame size allowed to be received or transmitted from or to a given physical port This implies that a Jumbo frame may be allowed to be RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 97 Configuration Pause limit in frame Pause limit out frame Ignore Frame checksum received from a given input port but may or may not be allowed to be transmitted out of a port or ports The possible values are 1522 2048 and 10240 Bytes NOTE The definition of frame size is counting the frame bytes from MAC_DA through Layer2 CRC of the frame Limit the number of continuous Pause refresh frames that can be received on this port if full duplex or the number of 16 consecutive collisions if half duplex When a port has flow control enabled this parameter can be used to limit how long this port ca
256. s created and RSTP service is initiated Should the RAy2 unit be connected via two Etherent cables using Eth1 and Eth2 ports the active participation of the RSTP protocol may be necessary If the parameter is not enabled the RAy2 unit transfers the BPDU frames transparently NOTE To enable proper RSTP functionality these switch parameters has to be set Switch settings Interface Port advanced Frame mode p5 CPU ether type DSA Switch settings Interface Port advanced Ether type pb CPU OxDADA Switch settings Advanced ATU settings Reserved multicast to CPU Enable Bridge The priority value is a number between 0 and 61440 in incremental steps of 4096 priority with a default value of 32768 Lower priority values are better The bridge with the lowest priority value will be elected root bridge Hello time s The hello time is the time between each Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU that is sent on a port Hello time is equal to 2 seconds by default 138 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Max age s The max age timer controls the maximum length of time that passes before a bridge port saves its configuration BPDU information This time is set to 20 sec by default Forward The forward delay is the time that is spent in the listening and learning state This time delay s is equal to 15 sec by default Algorithm This parameter sets the bridge s spanning tree algorithm to operate in
257. s frame classifier would be excluded from the ingress rate limiting calculations for this particular ingress rate resource When this parameter is enabled then SA ATU non rate limiting overrides can occur on this port An SA ATU non rate limiting override occurs when the source address of a frame results in an ATU hit where the SA s MAC address returns an Entry state with static non rate limiting value When this occurs the frame will not be ingress rate limited When this parameter is enabled then DA ATU non rate limiting overrides can occur on this port A DA ATU non rate limiting override occurs when the destination ad dress of a frame results in an ATU hit where the DA s MAC address returns an Entry state with static non rate limiting value When this occurs the frame will not be ingress rate limited This parameter determines which frame bytes are to be accounted for in the rate resource s rate limiting calculations There are for different supported configurations frame Frame based configures the rate limiting resource to account for the number of frames from a given port mapped to this rate re source layer 1 Preamble 8bytes Frame s DA to CRC IFG inter frame gap 12 bytes layer 2 Frame s DA to CRC layer 3 Frame s DA to CRC 18 4 if the frame is tagged A frame is considered tagged if it is either Customer of Provider tagged during in gress This parameter controls what kind of action is performed whe
258. se the VLAN Table bits if the frames VID is not contained in the VTU The ingressing frames are not discarded and it doesn t matter if the frames VID is a member of the VTU check Enable 802 1q for this Ingress port Do not discard Ingress Member ship violation but discard the frame if its VID is not contained in the VTU The ingressing frames VID must be configured in the VTU to enable it to ingress The VTU Member tag parameter doesn t have any effect secure Enable 802 1q for this Ingress port Discard Ingress Membership vi olations and discard frames whose VID is not contained in the VTU The ingressing frame is checked fully against the record in the VTU table The VID and the Member tag parameters are validated to allow the frame to ingress When this parameter is enabled all non MGMT frames that are processed as tagged are discarded as they enter this switch port Priority only tagged frames with a VID of 0x000 are considered untagged This feature works whether 802 1q is enabled on the port or not If the port is configured in Provide Mode and this parameter is enabled frames that contain an Ether Type that matches the port s PortEType Ether type parameter that have a non zero VID will be discarded When this parameter is enabled all non MGMT frames that are processed as untagged are discarded as they enter this switch port Priority only tagged frames with a VID of 0x000 are considered untagged This feature works whethe
259. ser accounts on the Peer unit are deleted RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 79 Configuration 7 4 4 Alarms Alarms Config Status Local n a Link Ok Link settings Status Acknowledge Config General Local Peer Radio Limit Enable SNMP trap Limit Enable SNN Service access Inside temperature C gt 80 o 80 O gt Alarms Voltage min V 40 O 40 O Switch settings wn maan V gt 160 O 60 zA RSS dBm lt 80 80 L1 Status E J SNR dB lt 10 o 10 O Interface _ BER gt 10e 6 v o 10e 6 v O Qos Net bitrate Mbps Jo O 0 O Advanced Air link down O O Tools Eth1 link down O o O O Maintenance Eth2 link down O O O O Live data Note SNMP trap IP address can be set at Services History Logs Apply Cancel Refresh Show defaults Programs Fig 7 13 Menu Link settings Alarms Config The diagnostic system of the link monitors the operation of the unit It generates various output of events system warnings and alarms The event is always written to the system log and indicated in the status bar and Alarms Status screen Some events have adjustable thresholds Events with no adjustable thresholds may or may not be Enabled If they are not Enabled the system event is not activated even if the system status is changed If the event goes above or below the set parameter limits or a link goes down or up you can choose to send an SNMP trap alarm default description Inside temper
260. set to default values except login password details Frequency The microwave link contains one or more frequency tables called rcinfo These tables tables contain the following information List of available bandwidths and modulations Assignment of frequencies to the channels and the names of these channels These channels are used to configure radio parameters of the link see screen Link settings Radio Default values of radio parameters A set of radio parameters needed for the ATPC operation Active Name of the currently used frequency table New Select a new frequency table Available tables are displayed in format lt name version gt Use the Change button to change the table WARNING Using the wrong frequency table can lead to violation of the correspond ing telecommunications regulations 148 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Restart Status Local RAy2 17L 07 04 Link Ok Link settings ud Backup Feature keys Firmware Radio adaptation Restart Local Peer Radio Target Y Service access Restart mode warm v Alarms System restart Restart Switch settings Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Fig 7 47 Menu Tools Restart Target Restart of selected unit Local or Peer Restart mode Warm Reboot management system Cold Restart the whole station as if power was removed System restart Performs
261. side of the link uses one polarization for transmission e g horizontal and the opposite polarization for receiving e g vertical The other side of the link is turned by 90 It therefore transmits and receives using opposite polarizations with respect to the other unit RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 21 Product 3 1 Mounting M Fig 3 2 RAy2 Microwave link antenna and FOD unit The antenna is attached to the mast using a holder adjustable in two planes The RAy2 unit is then mounted on the antenna There are two possible mounting positions for horizontal and vertical polarization Installation and adjustment of the holder is described in the Section 6 2 Antenna mounting Note The RAy2 10 and RAy2 11 units must be mounted with the same polarization while the units RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 must be mounted with reverse polarity see Cross polarization 3 2 Connectors Each unit is equipped with the following interfaces m ETH1 POE Gigabit metallic Ethernet port This port is capable of powering the unit with any Power over Ethernet power source working according to IEEE 802 3at standard m ETH2 Slotfor user exchangeable SFP module A wide range of optical modules is available Both single or dual mode transceivers can be used An SFP module with metallic RJ45 interface can also be used The SFP status LED is located just next to the slot m P DC power connector HW button for service purposes
262. sing Ping Check the connection between the PC and the unit via the Ethernet cable Under the Start menu type the command cmd in the Search programs and files box and press Enter Inside the cmd exe window that opens type ping 192 168 169 169 at the command prompt and press Enter Ping times and statistics are returned as shown C Users rking gt ping 192 168 169 169 Pinging 192 168 169 169 with 32 bytes of data from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time ims TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 byte 2 time 3ms TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time ims TTL 64 from 192 168 169 169 bytes 32 time 4ms TTL 64 Ping statistics for 192 168 169 169 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ims Maximum 4ms Average 2ms If no communication takes place a message appears with the text Request timed out If communication between the web browser and the unit doesn t take place check the browser settings E g the Work offline item in the File menu must not be crossed out 252 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o IP address in the PC Windows 8 Appendix E IP address in the PC Windows 8 Windows 8 allows you to access the Network Connections page in different ways for example m Using Start Button o Start button left down corner Right click choose Network Connections DEVICE iviahiager y a Network Connections Disk Management Comput
263. sp 73 5 MHz duplex spacing range 63 189 MHz Freq table rcinfo17_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz 17108 5 17115 5 17122 5 17129 5 17136 5 17143 5 17150 5 17157 5 17164 5 17171 5 17178 5 17185 5 17192 5 17199 5 17206 5 17213 5 17220 5 17227 5 Ch No Upper MHz 17168 0 17175 0 17182 0 17189 0 17196 0 17203 0 17210 0 17217 0 17224 0 17231 0 17238 0 17245 0 17252 0 17259 0 17266 0 17273 0 17280 0 17287 0 17294 0 Ch No Lower MHz 17105 0 17112 0 17119 0 17126 0 17133 0 17140 0 17147 0 17154 0 17161 0 17168 0 17175 0 17182 0 17189 0 17196 0 17203 0 17210 0 17217 0 17224 0 17231 0 Ch No Upper MHz 17171 5 17178 5 17185 5 17192 5 17199 5 17206 5 17213 5 17220 5 17227 5 17234 5 17241 5 17248 5 17255 5 17262 5 17269 5 17276 5 17283 5 17290 5 ver 2 1 210 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters RAy2 17 TX channel nominal frequencies Band 17 1 17 3 GHz default duplex sp 87 5 MHz Bandwidth 14 MHz duplex spacing range 66 5 182 MHz Freq table rcinfo17_default 14 basic channels default duplex optional channels Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Ch No Upper MHz 1
264. ss to the Local unit is blocked Access to the Local unit may be accidentally blocked for instance by disabling HTTPS access If you can access the Remote unit over HTTPS type its address in your web browser s address field The link will transfer the packet over the Local unit with blocked service access all the way to the Remote unit which will give you access to the control menus of both units Warning the Remote unit will report as Local Distinguishing Local Remote A unit accessed via service access always reports as Local If you connect through another peer unit and radio channel a certain amount of caution is necessary For example do not reduce the transmission power so that the link interrupts accidentally Errors of this type should be fixed by the rollback function within approx 1 minute Resolution can be done by comparing the length of ping on Local and Remote Pinging the unit behind the radio channel is slower The difference is more pronounced in the case of a long packet and the low speed of the radio channel Access security For better protection against unauthorised access to configuration you should only allow as few kinds of access as possible The most secure type is SSH with key leave only SSH active with only key choice RSS To configure the link and monitor its state several menus display the RSS signal strength Please keep in mind that Ray2 is not a measuring instrument hence the precision of the
265. ssions for filtering JavaScript format RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 157 Configuration 7 6 5 Programs Ping The Ping tool allows sending ICMP pings to a selected address Status Local Unit A 10 34 Link Ok Peer Unit B 1 Link settings Ping CLI General Destination Size B Count Radio 192 168 141 227 56 5 Service access gt gt ping c 5 s 56 192 168 141 227 Alarms PING 192 168 141 227 192 168 141 227 56 data bytes Switch settings 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 0 ttl 64 time 2 160 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 1 ttl 64 time 1 346 ms Status 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 2 ttl 64 time 1 414 ms 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 3 ttl 64 time 1 377 ms Interface 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 4 ttl 64 time 1 355 ms QoS 192 168 141 227 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss Advanced round trip min avg max 1 346 1 530 2 160 ms Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Help Fig 7 55 Menu Tools Programs Ping Start the test by clicking on Send The result is displayed in the text window Destination Destination address in dotted decimal notation The default address 127 0 0 1 is the localhost address i e the unit itself Size B Length of sent data 7 to 1500 bytes 8 bytes of the header will be added Count Number of sent pings The period for sending pings is constant 1000 ms
266. stantaneous bit error rate on link Net bitrate Instantaneous transmission capacity Eth1 Eth2 in Instantaneous speed 20s average of incoming user data on the user Eth throughput ernet port Eth1 Eth2 out Instantaneous speed 20s average of outgoing user data on the user Eth throughput ernet port TX power Instantaneous value of transmission power Viewer Detailed graphical view of one or two selected values for the given interval You can choose to view data from Local or Peer or both Local Unit A 10 25 Peer Unit B 10 25 T Alarm Thumbnails Viewer Data Primary Y axis Alarm Secondary Y axis oca ccess Temperature wv Eth2 out throughput b2 Peer C Mbps s J 45 13 0 0036 45 13 0 0032 4413 0 0028 43 13 0 0024 42413 0 002 ice 0 0016 41 13 0 0012 40 13 0 0008 39 13 0 0004 38 13 0 22 27 01 57 05 27 08 57 12 27 15 57 19 27 Time 2015 03 31 22 27 2015 04 01 22 12 gt lt Previous Interval 1 day Next gt Last gt gt Refresh Fig 7 52 Menu Tools History Viewer 154 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration The values are saved in the following resolutions and history lengths Resolution 1 minute length of history 7 days Resolution 15 minutes length of history 30 days Resolution 1 day length of history about 180 days Interval Selecting width of interval to be displayed Based on the interval width data is displayed in a suitable gri
267. t Duplex any combination 490 530 optional optional spacing MHz L and U units min 60 min 60 Channel spacing 1 75 3 5 7 14 20 1 75 3 5 7 14 28 3 5 7 14 28 3 5 7 14 28 CS MHz 28 56 30 40 56 40 50 56 40 50 56 Channel freq detail detail detail detail User speed 2 5 360 2 5 360 4 9 360 4 9 360 Mbps detail detail detail detail 81 64B 359Mbps Latency HS 234 1518B 359Mbps oe 100 2 5 Mbps 99 2 5 Mbps 96 4 9 Mbps 96 4 9 Mbps Sensitivily 67 340 Mbps 67 340 Mbps 66 340 Mbps 65 340 Mbps BER 10 dBm detail detail detail detail Output Power 10 13 QPSK 15 24 QPSK TNR CR dBm 10 8 256QAM 15 19 256QAM i su cg ATPC yes yes yes yes Consumption W 21 21 29 21 23 Weight kg 2 8 2 8 2 5 2 5 Radio param EN 302 217 2 2 V2 1 1 EN 300 440 2 V1 4 1 ver 2 11 172 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Technical parameters Modulation fixed QPSK 16 32 64 128 256 QAM or ACM Forward Error Correc LDPC User interface RJ45 1 Gb Eth 10 100 1000 IEEE 802 3ac 1000BASE T MTU 10240 B recommended cable S FTP CAT7 User interface SFP 1000Base SX 1000Base LX MTU 10240 B user exchangable SFP power consumption max 1 25 W Service USB A Power PoE 40 60 VDC IEEE 802 3at up to 100m up to 25 W DC 20 60 V floating Operating temperature range 30 55 C EN 300 019 1 4
268. t 13 B sub band Freq table rcinfo11_B_490_default 13 Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz Ch No Lower MHz Upper MHz 10709 875 11199 875 10841 125 11331 125 10937 375 11427 375 11068 625 11558 625 10711 625 11201 625 10842 875 11332 875 10939 125 11429 125 11070 375 11560 375 10713 375 11203 375 10844 625 11334 625 10940 875 11430 875 11072 125 11562 125 10715 125 11205 125 10846 375 11336 375 10942 625 11432 625 11073 875 11563 875 10716 875 11206 875 10848 125 11338 125 10944 375 11434 375 11075 625 11565 625 10718 625 11208 625 10849 875 11339 875 10946 125 11436 125 11077 375 11567 375 10720 375 11210 375 10851 625 11341 625 10947 875 11437 875 11079 125 11569 125 10722 125 11212 125 10853 375 11343 375 10949 625 11439 625 11080 875 11570 875 10723 875 11213 875 10855 125 11345 125 10951 375 11441 375 11082 625 11572 625 10725 625 11215 625 10856 875 11346 875 10953 125 11443 125 11084 375 11574 375 10727 375 11217 375 10858 625 11348 625 10954 875 11444 875 11086 125 11576 125 10729 125 11219 125 10860 375 11350 375 10956 625 11446 625 11087 875 11577 875 10730 875 11220 875 10862 125 11352 125 10958 375 11448 375 11089 625 11579 625 10732 625 11222 625 10863 875 11353 875 10960 125 11450 125 11091 375 11581 375 10734 375 11224 375 10865 625 11355 625 10961 875 11451 875 11093 125 11583 125 10736 125 11226 125 10867 375 11357 375 10963
269. tellation diagram hit Refresh To set a fixed modulation go to Link settings Radio switch off ACM and set the TX modulation to a value from the range of QPSK through 256 QAM based on the results of the previous test If you choose modulation higher than allowed by SNR the connection will be lost Status Link will lose its Ok value Both units will need to be moved closer to resume the link If this is not possible use the ethernet to access each unit individually and set the basic modulation QPSK You can monitor the quality of the received signal under Tools Live data RX constellation diagram Verify the functionality of the entire link If possible connect user devices to both RAy2 units over PoE and test mutual communication Another way of testing this is to connect a PC to the other unit and send a ping from one PC to the other The minimum variant of this test is to use an ethernet cable connection from the PC connected to the local RAy2 to the PC connected to the remote RAy2 and test communication between both units over ethernet This will verify ethernet functionality Prepare installation configuration Bandwidth e g 3 5 MHz To get the highest possible receiver sensitivity set the bandwidth as narrow as possible according to specific frequency band TX channel Use your allocated channel If you don t have allocated channel yet use for example channel L1 RX channel will setup automatically when channel lock activates
270. termines radio link properties n y The radio link calculation should be performed to determine proper antenna size Rough calculation can be done using a simple on line 1 calculator jn see the Overview List of datasheets Antenna mounting kit Other manufacturer s antennas can also be used with RAy2 links qu e The RAy2 unit can be attached by means of special interconnetions 2 There are several types of these parts for Andrew and Arkivator 3 y antennas It is also possible to develop interconnetions for other Y gt 9 ay antenna types see the Overview The bracket for mounting FOD unit on the antenna Flexible waveguide mounting kit The RAy2 unit can be attached to the antenna by flexible waveguide d gt Y SET RAY FX R100 LS EH J SET RAY FX R120 MI The bracket for mounting the flexible waveguide on the FOD unit Cable bushing a SET RAY2 CON B j ait y Basic set cable bushings and connectors A A H contains X 4 4 dd z 3 pc standard PG21 bushing with nut 2 pc blind plug Racom a 3 pc O ring 2 pc rubber sealing small diameter gt 3 pc rubber sealing medium diameter 2 pc rubber sealing big diameter 1 pc DC connector d 1 pc tie wrap 1 pc connector jumper 1 pc RJ 45 ethernet connector OOoOo0 000000 1 http www racom eu eng products microwave link html calculation http www racom eu eng products microwave link html accessories 30 RAy2 Microwave Link
271. ternet access on the task bar in the lower right corner J PERO o Select Change adapter settings in the Network and Sharing Center ae p Network and Sharing Center T DG gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center File Edit View Tools Help View your basic network information and set up connections Control Panel Home View your active networks Change adapter settings Change advanced sharing Nezn m s Access type No Internet access settings Public network Connections Sit Ethernet o Continue to the Network Connections page m On the Network Connections page o Select Properties from Ethernet Network drop down menu E Network Connections T e gt Network Connections File Edit View Tools Advanced Help Organise y Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Renamet y Sit Ethernet at Disable Real Status w Sit Ethernet 2 Network cable unplugged i TAP Windows Adapter V9 Wi F Not Diagnose Wy Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Es Properties o Choose Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Use the following IP address Networking Sharing Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Connect using Realtek PCle FE Family Controller General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network s
272. the antenna can be hung on the mounting plate holder Hang the antenna on it and tighten the lower bolt part No 8 Fig 6 12 Hanging the bolt on the holder Fig 6 13 Correct position of the mounting plate 46 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Installation d Tighten both bolts to the plate before continuing with installation to prevent any unnecessary movements of the equipment Before precisely adjusting the vertical direction of the antenna upon completing installation it will be necessary to unscrew them again as the lower bolt part No 8 passes through the adjustment block and the upper one part No 7 serves as the axis of rotation i jt Fig 6 14 Tightening the upper bolt to Fig 6 15 Tightening the lower bolt to the mounting plate the mounting plate e Beforeinstalling the FOD unit on the antenna first unscrew the 4 bolts on the back of the antenna enough so that the unit can be slid on to them Then check whether the O ring is correctly fitted on the antenna pin and make sure it is not damaged and has been lubricated with grease see Section 6 2 3 Lubrication and preservation of the antenna pivot Then remove the protective plastic cover from the central pin of the antenna and fit the FOD unit to it carefully so as not to damage the O ring Secure it in place with the four bolts Carefully ensure the correct polarization of the antenna see Section 6 2 1 Mounting methods Finally tight
273. the antenna pivot Before fitting the FOD unit bush onto the antenna pivot ensure that the O ring part No 1 is in the correct position It is also essential to prevent moisture getting in between these two parts This moisture could cause oxidation which would complicate disassembly of this mechanical coupling in the future For this reason we need to treat these surfaces with the grease which is supplied in the box marked SILIKONOVE MAZIVO If you use a different grease for lubrication then it should be a Teflon or a silicon grease Fig 6 22 Grease points on the antenna pivot and FOD unit bush Grease the internal area of the bush on the FOD unit 2 and the O ring 1 with a thin even layer that allows the pin to slide easily into the bush without damaging the O ring Grease the area beyond the O ring on the antenna pin 3 with a thicker layer so that it fills the gap caused by the play between the pin and the bush max 0 1 mm g thus preventing moisture getting in Installation should be carried out according to the antenna installation description see point f of this description The tub with grease is supplied with the RAy2 units 6 2 4 Flexible waveguide Any type of antenna may be connected to the RAy2 unit using a flexible waveguide Flexible waveguide mounting kit can be ordered as an accessory part Fig 6 23 Flexible waveguide assembly RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 49 Installation 6 3
274. ting 50 constellation diagram 151 copyright 7 D declaration of conformity 242 declaration of origin 246 default 8 37 settings 142 diagnostics constellation diagram 151 graphs 153 logs 157 ping 158 RSS indication 57 150 spectrum 152 dimensions 26 directing calculation 12 59 indication 57 lobes 58 screws 48 dump 90 E egress 86 queue 108 environment 239 eth adapter 35 F factory settings 142 feature keys 40 firmware 146 FOD unit assembly 45 frame type 103 frequency tables 148 frequency TX 176 Fresnel zone 17 function test after installation 61 before installation 40 G graphs 153 grounding 52 H help 162 https access 37 ingress 86 99 installation 22 polarization 21 44 66 K keys 145 feature 40 ssh access 257 ssh conversion 256 ssh generation 256 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 260 Index L leaky bucket 101 LED 22 25 licensing 239 link configuration 40 length 18 microwave 11 LLDP protocol 72 logs 157 M mapping 802 1p 111 DSCP 113 microwave link 11 N name plate 26 O ordering codes 27 P parameters setup 61 table 172 ping 158 PIRL 99 polarization cross 44 indication 66 mounting 42 policy 136 port parameters 92 trunking 140 power supply 23 priority 103 product 21 programs 158 Q QoS 83 R rain zone 13 248 rcinfo 148 restart 149 ro
275. tors oot eet ed ali denen 25 3 2 Overview of antennas nsei eet eaae a n nnne nnne rn nnns enses nns 26 3 3 Ordetng COS a 5e et obe ea OSes Aceh c EL e dene See de 27 10 1 Technical parameters oocccccconnnonnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nennen nene nnne nennt en nennen nnne nnns 172 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 5 Important Notice Important Notice Copyright 2014 RACOM All rights reserved Products offered may contain software proprietary to RACOM s r o further referred to under the ab breviated name RACOM The offer of supply of these products and services does not include or infer any transfer of ownership No part of the documentation or information supplied may be divulged to any third party without the express written consent of RACOM Disclaimer Although every precaution has been taken in preparing this information RACOM assumes no liability for errors and omissions or any damages resulting from the use of this information This document or the equipment may be modified without notice in the interests of improving the product Trademark All trademarks and product names are the property of their respective owners Important Notice Due to the nature of wireless communications transmission and reception of data can never be guaranteed Data may be delayed corrupted i e have errors or be totally lost Significant delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the
276. tructions contained in this manual Error free and safe operation of this equipment is only guaranteed if this RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 239 Safety environment licensing equipment is transported stored operated and controlled in the proper manner The same applies to equipment maintenance In order to prevent damage to the radio modem and other terminal equipment the supply must always be disconnected upon connecting or disconnecting the cable to the radio modem data interface It is necessary to ensure that connected equipment has been grounded to the same potential Only the undermentioned manufacturer is entitled to repair any devices Should the RAy2 unit be used with accessories other than those recommended Racom takes no responsibility for any malfunction caused by the use of such accessories Using unsuitable accessor ies e g cable connectors can result in mechanical damage to RAy2 internal connectors allow the penetration of water inside the unit or reduce the efficiency of internal surge protection circuits 11 4 Important Notifications The sole owner of all rights to this operating manual is the company RACOM s r o further referred to under the abbreviated name RACOM All rights reserved Drawing written printed or reproduced copies of this manual or records on various media or translation of any part of this manual in foreign languages without written consent of the rights owner is proh
277. unk Mask bits RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 141 Configuration 7 6 Tools 7 6 1 Maintenance Backup Local RAy2 17L 07 07 Link Ok Link settings General Backup Feature keys Firmware Radio adaptation Restart Radio Settings Local amp Peer Backup to external file Full Difference Service access pum Upload file Open file upload Switch settings Restore from file Restore Settings Internal backup Local Interface Internal backup Backup QoS Internal restore Restore Advanced Internal restore HW button 5 s Tools Maintenance Users Local Live data Backup to external file Download History Upload file amp restore Open file upload Logs 2a Default settings Programs Restore link settings Local amp Peer Restore Help Restore switch settings Local Restore Factory settings Local Factory settings cleans all logs restores default configuration and brings user accounts to default status Restore factory settings Restore Restore factory settings HW button on restart Diagnostic package Local amp Peer Create amp download file i Management Information Base SNMP MIB Down i Fig 7 43 Menu Tools Backup Settings Saving and restoring unit configuration User accounts are not affected by those Local amp Peer functions 142 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Configuration Backup to external file Upload file Restore from file Configuratio
278. unt 192 168 141 227 56 5 Send gt gt ping c 5 s 56 192 168 141 227 PING 192 168 141 227 192 168 141 227 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192 168 141 227 seq 0 ttl 64 time 2 863 ms 64 bytes from 192 16 64 bytes from 192 16 64 bytes from 192 16 64 bytes from 192 164 192 168 141 227 i 5 packets transmitte The Ping tool allows sending ICMP pings to a selected address round trip min avg m Start the test by clicking on Send The result is displayed in the text window Destination Destination address in dotted decimal notation The default address 127 0 0 1 is the localhost address i e the unit itself Size B Length of sent data 7 to 1500 bytes 8 bytes of the header will be added Count Number of sent pings The period for sending pings is constant 1000 ms Fig 7 60 Summary help The Help window can be moved by dragging the Hints bar Resize it by dragging the bottom corner 164 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Command Line Interface 8 Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface CLI provides an alternative to HTTPS access CLI allows you to work in a text regime interface using an ssh putty or telnet client 8 1 Connection via CLI 8 1 1 Telnet Use the telnet client to connect to the unit with service IP address 192 168 169 169 Type this in the command prompt telnet 192 168 169 169 Then use the username and password from the menu Service access Users for https
279. up to 15 min Mute peer TX The deactivation of Peer station transmission during measurement After using the analyzer visit any of the Link menu settings and select Refresh This restores the con figuration connection message Peer n a 152 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration 7 6 3 History The unit continuously stores information about the values of important variables Stored values can be viewed using three methods Thumbnails Viewer and Data Thumbnails Preview all values for the last 24 hours Click on a thumbnail to open the viewer with a chart Status Local Unit A 10 18 Link Ok Peer Unit B 10 18 Link settings Thumbnails Viewer Data General Description Quantities Radio Temperature Voltage RSS Service access Alarms Switch settings Status Interface DN pp apor QoS Misa SNR BER Net bitrz Tools Maintenance Live data gt History Logs Programs Eth1 in throughput Eth1 out throughput Eth2 in throi Help Eth2 out throughput TX power Refresh Fig 7 51 Menu Tools History Thumbnails Temperature Instantaneous value of temperature inside the unit Measured on the modem board Temperature of radio board is available via SNMP RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 153 Configuration Voltage Instantaneous value of unit supply voltage RSS Received signal strength SNR Signal to noise ratio of the received signal BER In
280. upports Configure this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator This connection uses the following items for the appropriate IP settings Y dall QoS Packet Scheduler tT ee L amp Microsoft Network Adapter Multiplexor Protocol ET NISL AI V 4 Microsoft LLDP Protocol Driver 8 Use the following IP address v 4 Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver IP address 192 168 169 160 v Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Y Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 veta SS v Intemet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 v Default gateway gt Install r Properties Obtain DNS server address automatically 254 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o IP address in the PC Windows 8 m Enter IP Address 192 168 169 160 m Set Subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 m Click OK to acknowledge these settings and close all windows Checking the IP address in the PC In Windows 8 proceed in the following manner Interconnect the configured unit and PC with an Ethernet cable Right click on the Start button type the command cmd and press Enter Inside the cmd exe window that opens enter the command ipconfig at the command prompt and find the information about IP address and mask among the list of messages returned Ethernet adapter Sit Ethernet Connection specific DNS Suffix fe8 cd89 18a7 ad5c 9Be274 IPv4 Address a s s 192 168 169 166 Subnet Mask 255
281. uration Internal VLAN Web server CLI telnet CLI SSH SNMP SNMP com munity string SNMP trap IP LED indicators Valid only for Service channel standard The RAy uses one VLAN id for internal service communication between both units There are two situations when it might be necessary to change the Internal VLAN id Conflict within user data flow when the same VLAN id is already present within a data flow Conflict with the internal management address of another RAy unit located at the same site and connected in the same LAN segment NOTE The Ethernet frames within this service channel are marked with IEEE 802 1p priority class 7 Default parameters for QoS and Egress queue control are pre set to prioritize this service communication channel Allows access via web server for HTTP and HTTPS protocol WARNING after disabling access via web server you will not be able to access the unit using a web browser Enables access via telnet protocol Provides access to CLI Command Line Interface for simple telnet clients Disabled by default Enables access via SSH protocol Provides secure access to CLI If preventing unau thorized access to the unit is the number one priority leave only this server on Enabling SNMP server Off by default SNMP community string Can contain both lower and uppercase letters numbers four characters _ and can be up to 256 characters long Address for sending SNMP traps
282. urned by RACOM to the customer by prepaid freight If circumstances do not permit the equipment to be returned to RACOM then the customer is liable and agrees to reim burse RACOM for expenses incurred by RACOM during servicing the equipment on site When equipment does not qualify for servicing under warranty RACOM shall charge the customer and be reimbursed for costs incurred for parts and labour at prevailing rates This warranty agreement represents the full extent of the warranty cover provided by RACOM to the customer as an agreement freely entered into by both parties RACOM warrants the equipment to function as described without guaranteeing it as befitting customer intent or purpose Under no circumstances shall RACOM s liability extend beyond the above nor shall RACOM its principals servants or agents be liable for any consequential loss or damage caused directly or indirectly through the use misuse function or malfunction of the equipment always subject to such statutory protection as may explicitly and unavoidably apply hereto RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 241 Safety environment licensing 11 6 Declaration of Conformity EP RACOM RADIO DATA NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity RAy2 10 r We Manufacturer RACOM Address Mirova 1283 592 31 Nove Mesto na Morave Czech Republic VAT CZ46343423 declare under our own responsibility that the product Product RAy2 10 sub bandA 10 300 10 420 MHz
283. v unmodify vj unmod mode Qos 802 1q mode disabled v disabled disabled v disable gt Advanced Discard tagged O O O O Tools Discard untagged VTU priority Live data override Force O History default VID Default VID 1 FID IGMP Help snooping ARP mirroring VLAN tunnel Member p2 Eth1 p4 Eth2 p5 CPU p6 Air O O O O none he none Mi none none Maintenance O O O Logs Programs mmm mim Nej mm N e Boo MM A O aAA 00 0 2 O El Apply Refresh Show defaults Fig 7 32 Menu Switch settings Advanced VLAN Setup of VLAN related and global parameters Link Remote unit authorization must take place to ensure user data flow between both authorization units See User manual Section 8 3 3 Remote unit authorization for more details guard The Link authorization guard parameter can be used to bypass this authorization re quirement Disabled Remote unit authorization is bypassed User data flow through the Air channel occurs even if the remote unit is not authorized Enabled User data flow through the Air channel occurs only if the remote unit is authorized according to the Remote unit authorization procedure 118 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration Remove one provider tag ARP without broadcast checking Port name When this parameter is enabled and a port is configured as a Provider Port recursive Provider Tag stripping will NOT b
284. with LC connector RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 83 Configuration MDIX Tx state Flow control Copper with RJ45 connector There can be one of the following scenarios scenario message SFP OK The SFP vendor string read out of SFP module The vendor model connector RJ45 LC and wavelength values are shown Separate window with more detailed information can be opened by clicking the more link No SFP No SFP module readerror n a no SFP option Status of the internal crossover of Ethernet cables MDIX internally crossed pairs MDI direct connection N A means an unknown state Port transmitting status can be transmitting Normal port operation paused Port transmitter is paused due to Pause frames reception Mechanism for temporarily stopping the transmission of data on an Ethernet network Enabling flow control allows use of buffers of connected active network elements for leveling uneven flow of user data For correct operation it is necessary to also enable Flow control on the connected device Flow control is handled by sending Pause frames to the connected device See Flow control and Pause limit parameters Flow control can be one of the following values disabled Flow control is disabled enabled Flow control is enabled active Flow control is enabled and activated The port has requested the link partner not to send any more data by sending Pause frames QoS Quality of Service status
285. within an Ethernet frame header when using VLAN tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q It specifies a priority value of between 0 and 7 inclusive that can be used by QoS discip lines to differentiate traffic The value 0 is generally taken as the lowest priority and 7 as the highest priority RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 111 Configuration Port name Enabled Prefer Default traffic class CoS remap Class of service Identification of the internal switch port The switch ports are connected to an ex ternal port or to an internal device radio modem management CPU Eth1 The external port with RJ45 interface labeled ETH1 POE Port 2 Eth2 The external port with SFP interface labeled ETH2 Port 4 CPU The internal port to management CPU It is physical port number 5 Air The internal port to radio modem i e link to the peer unit Port 6 The QoS classification according to IEEE 802 1p priority bits is enabled disabled Enable this parameter to force 802 p priority over DSCP When enabled the DSCP Prefer parameter is automatically disabled The IEEE 802 1q untagged frames thus having no IEEE 802 1p priority are treated with this priority The frame s IEEE 802 1p priority can be changed to other value Arranging individual priorities coded in priority bits according to IEEE 802 1p into selected output queue 0 3 112 RAy2 Microwave Link RACOM s r o Configuration DS
286. wn Maintenance Live data History Refresh Fig 7 14 Menu Link settings Alarms Status Overview of alarms All system alarms are listed on this screen Inactive alarms are colored white with an OK text label Active alarms are colored according to the severity of the alarm see below with a text message de scribing the measured value status critical major minor warning cleared OK v confirmed Fig 7 15 Alarm severity scale RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 81 Configuration Alarms Acknowledge Status Link settings General Radio Service access gt Alarms Switch settings Status Interface QoS Advanced Tools Maintenance Live data History Logs Programs Local Unit A 14 24 OLE Link Ok Peer Unit B 1 Status Acknowledge Config Alarm acknowledge Name State From NL NEM ser Comms Inside tempera Ack 2015 04 10 13 57 31 2015 04 10 13 59 22 admin Note 2 Voltage min OK Voltage max OK RSS Alarm 2015 04 10 14 16 51 SNR OK 2015 04 10 14 21 46 2015 04 10 14 21 47 BER OK Net bitrate OK Air link OK Eth1 link OK 2015 04 10 14 16 51 2015 04 10 14 20 32 Eth2 link Alarm 2015 04 10 14 20 32 RF power OK Comment Acknowledge Refresh Fig 7 16 Menu Link settings Alarms Acknowledge Alarm acknowledgement is a way to allow the operator to confirm the system is in alarm state Only an active alarm can be acknowledged Multiple selection of
287. www racom eu Microwave link Accessories E shop Accessories easiest to order here E shop RACOM Use there a search engine CtrltF and RACOM PART NUMBER of the searched item 18 http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi KIT GROUDING RAY pdf 19 http www racom eu download hw ray free eng 07_prislusenstvi ZSA16 en paf o http www racom eu eng products microwave link html accessories a https webservice new racom eu main eshop list a 1 amp t 10 RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 35 Step by step Guide 5 Step by step Guide The following chapters will guide you step by step through preparation installation and activation of the RAy2 link Pre installation check out Installation Chapter 6 nstallation Advanced configuration Chapter 7 Configuration Troubleshooting Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Pre installation Checklist Familiarise yourself with the controls and prepare your configuration ahead of the installation of the link on the mast tube Both units without antennas can lie on a desk with flanges running parallel and facing up at an angle on a non metal desk they can also face downward In the case of units RAy2 17 and RAy2 24 turn the unit holders so that they are roughly perpendicular to each other In the case of units operating in licensed bands RAy2 10 RAy2 11 turn unit holders so that they are roughly parallel to each other Use an ethernet cable to connect each of the u
288. xit O Always ONever S Only on clean ext _Options controlling SSH authentication Authentication methods C Attempt TIS or CryptoCard auth SSH1 Attempt keyboard nteractive auth SSH2 Authentication parameters C Allow agent forwarding C Allow attempted changes of usemame in SSH2 Private key file for authentication C downloads vay ppk Go back to Session and Save the configuration To connect select the name of the connection and click Open PuTTY asks for password created during key conversion RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 257 Https certificate Appendix G Https certificate When switching from older versions of the firmware the access certificate for https is changed New web browser configuration must take place in order to remove the link between the microwave link management IP address and the previous https certificate Mozilla Firefox how to 1 https certificate Remove management IP address from the list Tools Options Advanced Encryption View Certificates Servers Another possibility remove certificate Racom RAy or Racom RACOM s product from the list Tools Options Advanced Encryption View Certificates Authorities 2 Upon the new RAy unit connection following message appear This Connection is Untrusted 3 If you are sure that there is no security risk choose I Understand the Risks 4 The next step is Add Exception
289. y and disposed of properly Racom has instigated a programme to manage the reuse recycling and recovery of waste in an environmentally safe manner using processes that comply with the WEEE Directive EU Waste Electrical and Electronic EE quipment 2002 96 EC Battery Disposal This product may contain a battery Batteries must be disposed of properly and may not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste within the European Union See the product documentation for specific battery information Batteries are marked with a symbol which may include lettering to indicate cadmium Cd lead Pb or mercury Hg For proper recycling return the battery to your supplier or to a designated collection point 11 3 Liability for Defects and Safety Instructions Please read these safety instructions carefully before using the product Liability for defects does not apply to any product that has been used in a manner that conflicts with the instructions contained in this operator manual if the case in which the radio modem is packed has been opened or if the equipment has been tampered with Theradio equipment can only be operated on frequencies stipulated by the body authorised by the radio operation administration in the respective country and cannot exceed the maximum permitted output power RACOM is not responsible for products used in an unauthorised way Equipment mentioned in this operator manual may only be used in accordance with ins
290. y the FID returned from a VTU hit and it should be zero if not used It must be a unique number for each independent non overlapping address database if used IGMP IGMP and MLD Snooping When this parameter is enabled and this port receives an snooping IPv4 IGMP frame or an IPv6 MLD frame the frame is switched to the CPU port over riding the destination ports determined by the DA mapping When this parameter is disabled IGMP MLD frames are not treated specially IGMP MLD Snooping is intended to be used on Normal Network or Provider ports only ARP When this parameter is enabled non filtered Tagged or Untagged Frames that ingress mirroring this port that have the Broadcast Destination Address with an Ethertype of 0x0806 are mirrored to the CPUDest port This mirroring takes place after the ingress mapping decisions to allow ARPs to get to a CPU that is otherwise isolated When this bit is cleared to a zero no special ARP handling will occur VLAN tunnel When this parameter is disabled the port based VLANs defined in the VLAN Table 802 1q VLANs defined in the VTU and Trunk Masking are enforced fo ALL frames When this parameter is enabled the port based VLAN Table masking 802 1q VLAN membership masking and the Trunk Masking are bypassed for any frame entering this port with a DA that is currently static in the ATU This applies to unicast as well as multicast frames RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 121 Configuration
291. y2 24 Changed the Upper channels frequency for 56 MHz bandwidth at RAy2 17 RAy2 24 Revision 1 8 2014 11 24 Added the Switch settings Advanced menu description Revision 1 9 2015 03 06 Quick Start Guide new description Chapter 1 the technical parameters table moved to Chapter 10 Directing antennas the new explanation Revision 1 10 2015 03 25 Configuration updated Declaration of Conformity updated Revision 1 11 2015 04 21 USB accessories updated Alarm Acknowledge updated 50 MHz channel on 17 and 24 GHz 264 RAy2 Microwave Link O RACOM s r o Revision History Revision 1 12 2015 06 02 Updated for fw 2 1 7 0 Changes in the super user mode Order code description RAy2 10 radio parameters updated Accessories updated Revision 1 13 2015 12 01 Updated for fw 2 1 13 0 Diagram PIRL improved Diagram Advanced added RACOM s r o RAy2 Microwave Link 265

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

PDS-70mr 24V  Service Tracker Demo  ED-S3シリーズ 取扱説明書  Manual Técnico pdf  Cherry Numeric Keypad EN 21keys PS2 Black  INF-CP3J8  KitchenAid KSEG700EWH Use and Care Manual  AX-70TN, AX-130TN, AX-200TN AX-100TF, AX  First Alert SCO5 Smoke Alarm User Manual  ELIO®  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
DMCA: DMCA_mwitty#outlook.com.